Home

CC-Link IE Field Network Analog-Digital

1. aa aaa a a a a e a a e a eee ee ee 36 3 6 2 Extension A D converter module 0 28 on cds aa aaa a a 37 3 7 List of Remote Buffer Memory Areas 0 00 cc eee ee 38 3 7 1 Main A D converter module 0 00 ee eee ee eee 39 3 7 2 Extension A D converter module 32020 c on So oe hoo bes ls on bee She bees 44 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION 46 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 48 5 1 System Configuration with A D Converter Module 0 0 ce eee 48 52 Applicable Systems 22 tt cee ea te aa ee ee eo be ee ee eee dy 49 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 50 6 1 2s olaton Number Setting 6 amp faye eit ee he db Saye ert Ad A tive bd pe mune Sa hae Seay kee 50 6 2 Installation Environment and Installation Position 002 000 e eee eee 51 6 2 1 Installation environment 0 000 ee ee ee eae 51 622 Jlnstallaion POSHO 6244 cba tepeiekhke a E lia eto hae eS aeeeehoeneey wud 51 6 23 Installation direction euie ogee tes sehen eshte re Be Seca hice See a ho tere BAe hes 52 Oro sMISTANAUON YS wines aee a Seas pe Bee ee Ri er Gar ee ee eae ee 53 6 3 1 Howto connect an extension module 0 0000 eee 53 6 3 2 Howto mount modules on a DIN rail a nn aaa 0 0 0 0 ee 55 6 4 Wiring to Terminal Block for Module Power Supply and FG 0000085 58 6 5 Wiring of Ethernet Cable 0 0 0 0 cece eee ene n ees 60 6 6 Wiring of Terminal Block
2. 0000 209 Error history area address OAQOH to OFFFH 42 Error history clear command 223 Error history clear completed 224 Error history data1to15 4 222 Error notification function 00 142 Ethernet cables x srr a aoa kG we a hah atta 49 Extension connector cover 0 0000 21 Extension module identification code 221 External dimensions 00000 00 244 External power supply 20000 238 External power supply monitor request flag 200 External power supply monitor state flag 196 External power supply monitoring function 145 External power supply READY flag 197 External signal assignment function 146 Features 5 5 lt 3 Saree ea bed oe oe Sa oes 16 Functions with an extension module connected 145 SAIN LED e eaa 7 Beth ioe ap wag end ee 0 erect 21 Gal VaAlWG gritos eh hee eles eee tee ee 229 General specifications 000005 24 How to calculate current consumption 29 How to check error codes and alarm codes 168 How to connect an extension module 53 How to mount modules ona DIN rail 55 ae gh eer aa hee Wiehe calves te etna ey Ie terrae 21 Initial data setting completed flag 190 Initial data setting request flag 198 Input response time setting 212 Input response time
3. LA User s manual for the master local module used YIOMJON PI Jl YUIT OD Jo aul Buissesoiq 9 xipueddy 233 Appendix 7 EMC and Low Voltage Directives Compliance to the EMC Directive which is one of the EU Directives has been a legal obligation for the products sold in European countries since 1996 as well as the Low Voltage Directive since 1997 Manufacturers who recognize their products are compliant to the EMC and Low Voltage Directives are required to attach a CE mark on their products 1 Sales representative in EU member states Authorized representative in EU member states is shown below Name Mitsubishi Electric Europe BV Address Gothaer Strasse 8 40880 Ratingen Germany Appendix 7 1 Measures to comply with the EMC Directive The EMC Directive specifies that products placed on the market must be so constructed that they do not cause excessive electromagnetic interference emissions and are not unduly affected by electromagnetic interference immunity This section summarizes the precautions on compliance with the EMC Directive of the machinery constructed with the module These precautions are based on the requirements and the standards of the regulation however it does not guarantee that the entire machinery constructed according to the descriptions will comply with abovementioned directives The method and judgement for complying with the EMC Directive must be determined by the person who constructs th
4. X100A ws f mMov wiioo D2020 Read Latest error code X22 PJ _ _ _ _J _ _ A Turn on Error clear request flag RST Y100A Turn off Error clear request flag MOV Ww1101 D2021 Read Latest warning code Point If the master station does not receive a response for several link scans from the A D converter module it is recognized as a cyclic transmission faulty station resulting in the corresponding bit of the data link status of each station SWOOBO to SW00B7 turning on 2 Write the programs to the CPU module of the master station and reset the CPU module or turn off and on the power supply lt or Power OFF gt ON 3 Putthe CPU module of the master station into RUN EEH D jdwex4 wesbold 6 165 CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION There are no special inspection item as an A D converter module however to maintain the best condition of the system perform the inspection in accordance with the items described in the user s manual for the CPU module used 166 CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Memo 167 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes errors that may occur while the A D converter module is used and those troubleshooting 11 1 How to Check Error Codes and Alarm Codes Error codes can be checked by any of the following methods e Checking by executing a command of the slave station Page 168 Section 11 1 1 e Checking by Latest er
5. H1 CH f oH2 cHe CHS CHa foe es Par ge Poe a 0 ss oo 18 vont CHD CH3 CH8 chi CHa for Pin number Signal name 1 NC 2 NC 3 V 4 CH1 COM 5 6 SLD 7 V 8 CH2 COM 9 10 V 11 CH3 COM 12 I 13 SLD 14 V 15 CH4 COM 16 17 AG 18 FG1 Point Do not wire the NC terminals Incorrect wiring may cause failure or malfunction of the module SO8DIABQ JeUJE XJ pue yoo g jeuiwa L JO BULIM 9 9 65 66 b Wiring to the terminal block The following shows wiring to the terminal block e For voltage input CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 e For current input CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 1 cy gt CH1 COM T CH2 E Er de on gt Saur JA M CH i CH1 CH i i z CH3 COM C V ka CH V CH4 c a a na Oe ee ean a a CH4 cy gt ma COM mi CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING c Precautions for external wiring To obtain the maximum performance from the functions of the A D converter module and improve the system reliability an external wiring with high durability against noise is required Precautions for external wiring are as follows e Use separate cables for the AC control circuit and the external input signals of the A D converter module to avoid the influence of the AC side surges or induction e Do not install cables together with the main circuit lines high voltage lines or power cables for equipment other than the programmable controller Nois
6. Number of conversion enabled channels maximum Set value in Conversion Synchronization period of the speed setting master station Extension A D converter Main A D converter module module 2 a a a 2 1ms channel 4 2 100us channel Setting the number of conversion enabled channels beyond the limits shown above results in the error code OE40H or 1E40H being stored in Latest error code RWr0 Error flag RXA turning on and the ERR LED turning on with no A D conversion performed In addition the occurrence of an error error code OE40H or 1E40H during operation causes the A D conversion to be interrupted CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 5 Setting procedure A D converter module 7 On the CCIE Field Configuration window select the main A D converter module from List of stations and set the values as follows e When the master station is the simple motion module set Station No to 17 or more e In RX RY Setting make an assignment of 32 points In RWw RWr Setting make an assignment of 16 points 2 Open the Parameter Processing of Slave Station window and set Method selection to Parameter write TT CC IE Field Configuration window gt Select the main A D converter module from List of stations gt CC IE Field Configuration gt Online gt Parameter Processing of Slave Station 3 In Station parameter set Mode switch to 9 Automatical judgment mode Mode switch
7. Device Name wa101 T C Set Value Reference Progri Buffer Memory Module Start HES 9 Addr Display format i Modify Value 2 w 1l 32 27 E4 asc 10 Cal Details Open E SOPOD wuejy pue SEPOD 10113 YOOUD O0 MOH L LL 171 11 2 Error Code List This section describes error codes Error codes are classified by error number as follows Error code Classification Reference 0000H to OFFFH 1FOOH to 1F40H D529H D52BH Errors relating to the main A D converter module Page 173 Section 11 2 1 1 1000H to 1FFFH Errors relating to the extension A D converter module Page 178 Section 11 2 2 1 E lating to the CC Link IE Field Network DOOOH to DFFFH D529H and D52BH excluded T AEE N E RE ecead Page 177 Section 11 2 1 2 172 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 2 1 Main A D converter module 1 Error code list 0000H to OFFFH 1F00H to 1F40H D529H D52BH The errors are classified into the following three types Classification Description Major error This error is a sign that recovery is impossible with the RUN LED turning off Moderate error This error is a sign that the module cannot continue to operate with the ERR LED turning on Minor error This error is a sign that the module can continue to operate with the ERR LED flashing If any of these errors occur check that the D LINK LED lights up and take the corrective actions corresponding to the error code w
8. Received transient split error i split Point For two or more errors only the latest error code is stored in Latest error code RWr0 or Latest warning code RWr1 The errors that have occurred in the past can be checked in the error history of the engineering tool For the error history refer to the following e Checking by executing a command of the slave station Page 168 Section 11 1 1 e Error history data Page 222 Appendix 3 23 177 11 2 2 Extension A D converter module 1 Error code list 1000H to 1FFFH The errors are classified into the following two types Classification Description Major error This error is a sign that recovery is impossible with the RUN LED turning off This error is a sign that the module cannot continue to operate with the ERR LED of the main analog module turning on Moderate error If any of these errors occurs check that the D LINK LED lights up and take the corrective actions corresponding to the error code with the list below Error code Classification Description and cause Action 1010H 1100H 1200H 1300H 1310H 16A0H 178 Major error Hardware failure Range setting out Moderate error of range Averaging time setting out of range Moderate error Count average setting out of range Moderate error Moving average setting out of range Moderate error Process alarm Moderate error i setting error
9. The data sent to the extension analog module is abnormal CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Action Set one of the following values in the channel where an error has occurred of Input signal error detection setting address 0209H e Disable OH e Disconnection detection 4H e Set the input range of the channel that detects disconnection within the range of 4 to 20mA or 1 to 5V e Set Input signal error detection setting address 0209H of the corresponding channel to a value other than Disconnection detection 4H Adjust the value to fall within the range of 32000 to 32000 in CH1 Scaling lower limit value address 0221H to CH4 Scaling upper limit value address 0228H Adjust the settings of CH1 Scaling lower limit value address 0221H to CH4 Scaling upper limit value address 0228H as follows Scaling lower limit value lt Scaling upper limit value Take the following actions and then turn off and on the module power supply or perform remote reset e Reduce the number of conversion enabled channels e Change the synchronization period of the master station to a longer period Check the contact state of the extension module and whether the extension module is a connectable module If the same error occurs again the failure of the module is a possible cause Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Adjust Extension module identification code address 0200H to match the type and the n
10. conversion processing Conversion 1 i p h precessing I of other channels J Sampling period Period for conversion processing of one channel The sampling cycle varies depending on the type of main analog module the conversion speed the type of extension module and the number of conversion enabled channels The following table shows the classification Conversion x Main analog module Extension module Sampling period Reference speed setting e Not connected Conversion speed x Number of P 1 ti 5 1 1 e Extension I O module conversion enabled channels age Sis Solong 1 200us x Number of conversion 1 P 91 Section 8 5 1 2 ane enabled channels ae A 2 a Mai D t 500 Number of i edie a Extension A D converter module 400us T nina Page 92 Section 8 5 1 2 b module enabled channels ims x Number of conversion 1 P 2 ti 5 1 2 200us x Number of conversion Extension D A converter module Page 93 Section 8 5 1 3 enabled channels e Not connected 100us x Number of conversion 9 e Extension I O module enabled channels Main D A converter 200us x Number of conversion Extension A D converter module me Page 94 Section 8 5 1 4 module enabled channels 200us x Number of conversion Extension D A converter module pein en 2 enabled channels 4 For a D A converter module this column corresponds to the conversion period 2 For details refer to the following LA CC Link IE Field Network Digi
11. e K Page 128 Section 8 15 3 Conversion speed switch function Cannot be used Shift functi een The setting of CHO Shifting amount to conversion value RWw2 to RWws RWw12 to RWw15 will be ignored Cannot be used Turning on CHO Difference conversion trigger RY14 to RY17 RY24 to RY27 from off does not allow difference conversion to start UOIJOUN UOISIOAUOD J2 SL s Difference conversion function 127 3 How the trigger conversion function operates After setting up the A D conversion enabled channels and other settings turning on and off Initial data setting request flag RYQ results in the module entering the waiting for trigger input state Turning on Trigger conversion request RY19 RY29 from off enables A D conversion in all the channels where A D conversion is enabled Ee Operation until Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 turns on from off after turning on Trigger conversion request RY19 from off with the main A D converter module set to the following conditions e Conversion speed setting 400us e A D conversion enabled CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Ne gt Controlled by the A D converter module Controlled by the program Trigger conversion request RY19 Sf OFF A OFF j Waiting for tri oa f A D conversion of CH1 aoe or trigger Waiting for trigger input ND ous E conversion l I i conversion 4 A D conversion of CH2 Waiting for trigger puta Waiting for trigger input Waiting
12. 02200 2a 216 Checking by executing a command of the slave station Ce a E tr aC or a ge ee 168 Checking by latest error code RWr0 171 Checking by latest warning code RWr1 171 Checking the LEDs 0000008 181 Connectable modules 02000 0 ees 49 Connecting an Ethernet cable 60 Conversion speed switch 00 205 Conversion speed switch function 89 Count average rsi ese ein Heed bean ses 96 Current input characteristics 231 Cyclic data update watch function 145 Cyclic data update watch time setting 211 CLIN Te ha ura aati oh aon as oe nce aaa ae cleo nes 21 Details of remote I O signals 189 Difference conversion function 122 Digital clipping enable disable setting 219 Digital clipping function 0 117 Digital operation value 000000e 88 Digital output HOLD CLEAR setting 213 Digital output HOLD CLEAR setting function 145 DIN vail HOOK sirar it aban 22s eel Ses 21 23 DIN rail stopper 2 00 eee ee eee 57 DISCONNECING 252 sure ie A 61 EMC Directive related standards 234 ERR LED eeu hk raea Boke wid dha aaa ae ied 21 Error clear request flag 0005 198 Emorcodelist 2 ato hie Going adie etal use OA ta 172 EWPOn aC xia cane ice hie ecb aha wine he A ae th Se 191 Error flag assignment
13. 25 Error history clear completed This remote buffer memory shows the error history clear completed status stored in the non volatile memory b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 foe ofolofe ojole efojole opoy The values of b1 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Not Sones 1 Completed a Behavior of error history clear Upon completion of the error history clear Error history clear completed address 1001H turns to Completed 1 For the timing Not performed 0 Completed 1 Not performed 0 refer to the following e Error history clear command s Page 223 Appendix 3 24 b Default value The default value is Not performed 0 c Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory address of this area is as follows Remote buffer memory name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Error history clear command 1000H 224 APPENDICES 26 Parameter area initialization command This command is used to set parameters in remote buffer memory areas and non volatile memory to a default value In the event of a non volatile memory data error parameter error code 0130H using this command makes it possible to recover the module b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi fle ofofole ofololeojole lool The values of b1 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Not commanded 1 Commanded a Behavior of parameter area initialization Setting Parameter area initialization comma
14. 4 The extension A D converter module does not have a MAC address UOISI9 UONOUN pue JOQLUNN Elas Y29409 0 MOH 8 xipueddy 241 Appendix 9 Comparison with NZ2GF2B 60AD4 Appendix 9 1 Comparison of performance specifications The following table shows the differences in the performance specifications between the NZ2GF2BN 60AD4 and the NZ2GF2B 60AD4 Item NZ2GF2BN 60AD4 NZ2GF2B 60AD4 Accuracy Ambient t t t 0 2 a emperature 0 to 40 2 e 100us channel e 400us channel Conversion speed e 400us channel e 1ms channel e 1ms channel 24VDC 20 4 to 28 8VDC 24VDC 20 4 to 28 8VDC External power supply Inrush current 36 5A 1ms or lower Inrush current 31 2A for 1 5ms or shorter Current consumption 210mA Current consumption 230mA Appendix 9 2 Functional comparison The following table shows the differences in the functions between the NZ2GF2BN 60AD4 and the NZ2GF2B 60AD4 Item NZ2GF2BN 60AD4 NZ2GF2B 60AD4 Allows switching into the following conversion speeds Conversion speed switch function e 100us channel e 400us channel e 1ms channel Allows switching into the following conversion speeds e 400us channel e 1ms channel Allows switching between 100us channel and Speed switching of the trigger conversion function S ages lager conversion UNCON 400us channel Not available Conversion speed switching of the CC Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function Allows switching between 1
15. Conversion processing CESE ee ee a Conversion processing Conversion processing Conversion processing Sampling period of the main D A converter module 100us 100us x 4 800us Sampling period of the extension A D converter module 100us 100us x 4 800us 94 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 6 A D Conversion Method Set whether to perform sampling processing or averaging processing for each channel 1 Sampling processing This processing performs A D conversion on analog input values in sequence The converted values at this time are referred to as digital operation values For a main A D converter module digital operation values are stored into CHO Digital operation value RWr2 to RWr5 at every sampling periods For an extension A D converter module digital operation values are stored into CHU Digital operation value RWr12 to RWr15 at every sampling periods The sampling period of the main A D converter module and the extension A D converter module depends on the conversion speed setting and the number of conversion enabled channels For details refer to the following e Conversion Speed and Sampling Period Page 90 Section 8 5 1 2 Averaging processing This processing performs averaging processing on digital operation values for each channel storing the average values into CHO Digital operation value RWr2 to RWr5 RWr12 to RWr15 There are three types of averaging processing as follows e Time aver
16. GHI Process alarm upper upper limit value tee GH Process alarm upper lower limit value GHI Process alarm lower upper limit value tee GH Process alarm lower lower limit value Item Setting range CHO Process alarm upper upper limit value CHO Process alarm upper lower limit value 32768 to 32767 CHO Process alarm lower upper limit value CHO Process alarm lower lower limit value Point Alert output function must meet the following condition Process alarm upper upper limit value gt Process alarm upper lower limit value gt Process alarm lower upper limit value Process alarm lower lower limit value For the extension A D converter module make the settings for each item of Ext module 1_ Module parameter 107 wey SS 201d UONOUNY nd no Haly OLS 8 11 Scaling Function This function performs scale conversion on a digital output value with the range of the scaling lower limit value and the scaling upper limit value both of which are set at desired values The value after scale conversion is stored in CHO Digital operation value RWr2 to RWr5 RWr12 to RWr15 1 How to interpret the scaling setting If the input range is set to 10 to 10V For the scaling lower limit value set a value corresponding to the lower limit of the input range 16000 and for the scaling upper limit value set a value corresponding to the upper limit of the input range 16000 2 Calculation of the digital operation value S
17. Is the A D converter module a reserved station Is stop of the data link checked through CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Is the station number setting switch set to other than 1 to 120 7 When the L ER LED turns on Check item Are Ethernet cables normal Does the switching hub in the system normally operate Do other stations connected to the main A D converter module operate normally Is the mode of the master station set to other than Online Is there any noise affecting the system Is the loopback function enabled for the master station 182 Action Connect the engineering tool to the master station and then check if a data link is established in the own station by using CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics LU User s manual for the master local module used Replace the cable with a 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cable LA User s manual for the master local module used Change the station to station distance to 100m or less Refer to the manual for the Ethernet cable used and correct the bend radius Replace the Ethernet cable Check if the power supplies of the other stations are turned on e Check if a 1O0OBASE T compliant switching hub is used QA User s manual for the master local module used e Check if the power supply of the switching hub is turned on Two or more stations are overlapping Change the setting so that all the station numbers differ Action Match the station number of the
18. Lights out P i O 1 O i 4 1 n 1 9 i i gt RWr1 i 3 ON Remote READY RXB 105 106 1 Process alarm notification a For the main A D converter module If a digital operation value enters the alert output range being equal to or greater than the process alarm upper upper limit value or being equal to or less than the process alarm lower lower limit value Alert output flag RWrB Alert output signal RX18 and the turning on of the ALM LED of the main module notify an alert e Alert output flag RWrB The bit corresponding to the contents of the alert turns on Page 203 Appendix 2 6 e Alert output signal RX18 On e ALM LED of the main module On In addition the alarm code OAAQ is stored in Latest warning code RWr71 b For the extension A D converter module 2 3 4 5 If a digital operation value enters the alert output range being equal to or greater than the process alarm upper upper limit value or being equal to or less than the process alarm lower lower limit value Alert output flag RWr1B Alert output signal RX28 and the turning on of the ALM LED of main module notify an alert e Alert output flag RWr1B The bit corresponding to contents of the alert turns on Page 203 Appendix 2 6 e Alert output signal RX28 On e ALM LED of the main module On In addition the alarm code 1AA O is stored in Latest warning code RWr1 For details on alarm co
19. M E External signal assignment function 0 Normal conversion mode Trigger conversion signal assignment ele ele P i Trieeer conversion mode TERO Pa aa red eae gee ae We al od ol 2 Automatical judement_mode 3 In Basic module parameter set CHO A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable M E 4 D conversion enable disable setting pea oe eee OH A D conversion enable disable setting GH A D conversion enable disable setting Enable jie GH8 A D conversion enable disable setting 0 Enable MARE GH4 440 conversion enabledisahle settine Frahle I Disable 4 Click Execute button to write the parameters to the A D converter module 5 Check that 0920H is stored in Latest warning code RWr1 X Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Batch Device Device Name wiii T C Set Value Reference Progr Buffer Memory Module Start HEX fidd Display format Modify Value if 2 HA 22 32 64 psc 10 D Details Open Dewe __frle piclsjalo si7 s sja s 2iajof of o w1101 0 0 o oF o of o oE olol olol ol 6 Turn off and on the module power supply or perform the remote reset to switch the A D converter module to trigger conversion mode Point For the extension A D converter module make the settings for each item of Ext module 1_ Module parameter CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 16 CC Link IE Field Network Synchronou
20. Various extension modules can be connected according to the application A No wiring of wires and Ethernet cables is required VVA Main module Extension module The flexible combination is possible Extension A D converter module Extension D A converter module 2 Easy setting of station numbers Station numbers are set with the rotary switch on the front of the module where setting and checking the station numbers are easy 3 Selectable conversion speed A D conversion at 100us channel meets the need of a high speed conversion Under the environment in which noise is likely to occur switching the conversion speed to 400us channel or 1ms channel minimizes the effect of noise on the digital operation value the stability of which is improved CHAPTER 1 A D CONVERTER MODULE 4 A D conversion at any desired timing A D conversion is performed once immediately after the input of a trigger conversion request to obtain the digital operation value The combination with the external signal assignment function allows direct input of a trigger conversion request from the extension input module with the following advantages e Being free from the effect of the sequence scan and link scan digital operation values can be constantly obtained at a given timing which leads to the improvement of the reliability e Digital operation val
21. for extension output module RY1F Point Do not use any Use prohibited remote I O signals If any of the signals are used correct operation of the module cannot be guaranteed 33 1 Remote I O signals of extension modules The remote I O signals differ depending on the model of extension module e For the extension A D converter module refer to Page 34 Section 3 5 2 e For the extension D A converter module refer to LA CC Link IE Field Network Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual e For the extension I O module refer to LA CC Link IE Field Network Remote I O Module User s Manual 3 5 2 Extension A D converter module Remote input Remote output Signal direction Extension A D converter Signal direction Master local module Extension A D Module type module Master local module converter module RX20 CH1 A D conversion completed flag RY 20 Use prohibited RX21 CH2 A D conversion completed flag RY 21 Use prohibited RX22 CH3 A D conversion completed flag RY22 Use prohibited RX23 CH4 A D conversion completed flag RY23 Use prohibited RX24 CH1 Difference conversion state flag RY 24 CH1 Difference conversion trigger RX25 CH2 Difference conversion state flag RY25 CH2 Difference conversion trigger RX26 CH3 Difference conversion state flag RY26 CH3 Difference conversion trigger RX27 CH4 Difference conversion state flag RY27 CH4 Difference conversion trigger Extension A D a eonvernermodule RX28 Ale
22. 9 Mode switch setting The value set in Mode switch address Bi o ang oprie Moguls PAN SUPRIYO l 0920H Minor error change S000 hasbeen changed operate the module as specified in Mode switch Scaling upper lower 0910 H 1 Moderate error __ limit value inverted address 0000H Cyclic data update The value set in Cyclic data update watch time j S es a we Set a value within the range of 0 to 20 in Cyclic 0930H Moderate error watch time settin address 0007H is outside the range of 0 to 3 data update watch time address 0007H out of range 20 Station number While the module power is on set the switch a The setting of the station number switch has EN 0940H Minor error switch changed i again to the station number that has been set lt been changed while the module power is on error before m The influence of noise or the hardware failure is a 9 i r O ossible cause If the same error occurs again Clock data out of The clock data acquired from the CPU module P g 2 0950H Moderate error a even after measures have been taken against D range is invalid WR noise please consult your local Mitsubishi TA representative i Take measures against noise and reset the yy oe P module If the same error occurs again the i Communication An invalid data that implies an altered setting i i g 0960H Major error UE hardware failure of the module is a possible error 3 of the communication LSI h
23. A r A I P A I channels CH1 to CH4 processing processing processing processing a sss mal me A a a ae I 50 _ _e 5 e 1 RS eo 1 Ol Keer O C i 1 Extension A D converter y P Vy 0 Vv module conversion enabled Conversion i Conversion i Conversion i Conversion i I m i I A i I A channels CH1 to CH4 i processing l processing processing processing aa i i M t i ee E b_n a E a r I Sampling period of the main A D converter module 400us 100us x 4 2000us 2ms Sampling period of the extension A D converter module 400us 100us x 4 2000us 2ms c With a conversion speed of 1ms With a conversion speed of 1ms the time interval is 1ms including the processing time 100us Therefore the sampling period is given by the following Sampling period Conversion speed 1ms x Number of conversion enabled channels Assuming that the conversion speed setting is 1ms and the number of conversion enabled channels is 4 for both the main A D converter module and the extension A D converter module Sampling period of the main A D converter module Ims ims ims ims Main A D converter module F F conversion enabled i Conversion i Conversion l i Conversion l i Conversion I 7 A 1 t I channels CH1 to CH4 H processing processing processing
24. Indicates the operating status of the extension A D converter module e On In normal operation e Flashing External power supply being off e Off Major error occurred main analog module being in offset gain setting mode or main analog module being in unit test mode 2 A hook for mounting a module on a DIN rail Covers for preventing electric shock while the power is on i A two piece terminal block for the connection to an external device 4 A terminal block for the connection of an external power supply 24VDC and FG QINPO JOWEAUOD C V uosuax Z Z 23 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes the specifications of the A D converter module 3 1 General Specifications Item Specifications O ti ient perating ambien 0 to 55 C temperature St bient orage ambien 25 to 75 C temperature Operating ambient humidity 5 to 95 RH non condensing Storage ambient humidity Compliant with JIS Vibration resistance B 3502 and IEC Unger intermittent 5 to 5t08 4Hz 4Hz 85mm 5mm 61131 2 Under continuous 5 t0 8 4Hz ee oe ie C re E Shock resistance Compliant with JIS B 3502 and IEC 61131 2 147m s 3 times each in X Y and Z directions Operating No corrosive gases atmosphere Operating altitude 0 to 2000m Installation location Inside a control panel 2 Overvoltage 3 I or less category Pollution degree 2 or less Equipment class Class I Constant Frequency Half amplitude Num
25. Mode switch aaau aaua 205 Module control data area address 1000H to 14FFH iae pee a e Ne A aa 43 Module control data area address 1200H to 12FFH E d uel tht a lg ths re dal Sh ve nots r A a 45 Module operation information initialization command SEPERTI T EEA EEEE S A T 227 Module operation information initialization completed se Gc A E A Ga A a e Sebo aets 228 Monitor area address 0500H to O9FFH 41 Monitor area address 0700H toO7FFH 45 Moving average 1 ee eee 97 Number of ON times integration function 145 246 OCG TED erian r tack eee 21 OFFSET LED r cra e a Shs dae Seas 21 Offset value 2 2 000 eee ee ees 229 Offset gain setting 0 0 0 0 0 ce eee ee 83 Others 6 doc ke te ode ete a 238 Pied fst aaeeea a Ges ae Mc elas Gane tae See 21 2 cbs Slee Ginn tl BS Ute ue es eae te ee ka 21 PACKING IS asierea Steer ce chute test a Sea tea a Seah bho Se 14 Parameter area address OOOOH to O4FFH 39 Parameter area address 0200H to O2FFH 44 Parameter area initialization command 225 Parameter area initialization completed 226 Parameter settings n on noaea aaa 69 Part NAMES seve aca hn r haber a hs A ERA 20 Performance specifications 25 Precautions for programming 155 Procedures before operation 46 Program example 0000 e eee eee 156 Programming 2 oncinstic dud denen Seared Beem des
26. Module hardware error The value set in Range setting address 0203H is out of the range O indicates the number of the channel that has been incorrectly set The time average value set in CHO Time average Count average Moving average address 0205H to 0208H is out of the range of 2 to 5000ms O indicates the number of the channel where an error has occurred The time average value set in CHO Time average Count average Moving average address 0205H to 0208H is less than 4 x Sampling period ms O indicates the number of the channel where an error has occurred The count average value set in CHO Time average Count average Moving average address 0205H to 0208H is out of the range of 4 to 65000 times O indicates the number of the channel where an error has occurred The moving average count value set in CHO Time average Count average Moving average address 0205H to 0208H is out of the range of 2 to 128 times O indicates the number of the channel where an error has occurred The settings in CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value address O20FH to CH4 Process alarm upper upper limit value address 021EH have an inconsistency in magnitude relation O indicates the number of the channel that has been incorrectly set A indicates that the set values are in one of the following conditions 2 Process alarm lower lower limit value gt Process alarm lower upper limit value 3 Process alarm lowe
27. OFF of Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 does not affect Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 which remains Waiting for conversion OFF e Even after Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 turns to Conversion completed ON Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 remains Conversion completed ON unless Trigger conversion completed clear request RY1A RY2A is turned from No request OFF to Clear request ON For the timing OFF ON OFF refer to the following e Trigger conversion completed flag Page 194 Appendix 1 1 8 For the trigger conversion function refer to the following e Trigger Conversion Function Page 127 Section 8 15 a Device number The device numbers of this output signal are as follows Signal name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Trigger conversion completed clear request RY1A RY2A 6 Maximum value minimum value reset request Turning on and off Maximum value minimum value reset request RY1D RY2D allows CHO Maximum value address 0601H 0603H 0605H 0607H 0701H 0703H 0705H 0707H and CHO Minimum value address 0602H 0604H 0606H 0608H 0702H 0704H 0706H 0708H to be cleared For the timing OFF gt ON gt OFF refer to the following e Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag Page 196 Appendix 1 1 10 a Device number The device numbers of this output signal are as follows Signal name Main A D converte
28. depends on the type of the extension module For details on the remote register refer to the following e K Page 201 Appendix 2 SlasIBay a OWsayY JO SI7 9 E 35 3 6 1 Main A D converter module Remote register RW Module type Signal direction Master local module gt Main A D converter module module Device No Description Device No Description RWr0 Latest error code RWw0 Use prohibited RWr1 Latest warning code RWw1 Use prohibited RWr2 CH1 Digital operation value RWw2 CH1 Shifting amount to conversion value RWr3 CH2 Digital operation value RWw3 CH2 Shifting amount to conversion value RWr4 CH3 Digital operation value RWw4 CH3 Shifting amount to conversion value RWr5 CH4 Digital operation value RWw5 CH4 Shifting amount to conversion value RWr6 CH1 Difference conversion reference value RWw6 Use prohibited Main A D RWr7 CH2 Difference conversion reference value RWw7 Use prohibited converter module RWr8 CH3 Difference conversion reference value RWw8 Use prohibited RWw9 Use prohibited RWwA Use prohibited RWwB Use prohibited RWwC Use prohibited RWwD Use prohibited RWwE Use prohibited RWr9 RWrA CH4 Difference conversion reference value Input signal error detection flag RWrB RWrC RWrD RWrE Alert output flag Use prohibited Use prohibited Use prohibited RWwF Use prohibited RWrF Use prohibited 4 The registers RWrF and RWwF are used by the system in synchronous communication mode Point Do not re
29. ee ene ren e bn rode address 0000H 1 Trigger conversion mode ils 9 Automatical judgment mode default value For the NZ2GF2BN 60AD4 Mode switch address 0000H is set to 9 Automatical judgment mode by default Hence if the default value is left using a master station that supports the CC Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function results in the NZ2GF2BN 60AD4 operating in synchronous communication mode To operate the NZ2GF2BN 60AD4 in normal mode change the set value of its Mode switch address 0000H to 0 Normal conversion mode 243 vdV09 9Z4DZZN YUM uosuedwop 6 xipueddy vdV09 NEZADZZN 9 PAVO09 AZAOZZN WOY JUSWsde daJ jnogy 6 xIpusddy Appendix 10 External Dimensions Appendix 10 1 Main A D converter module EL O m 5 7 9 11 7 13 7 15 7 17 TENAN SERED Unit mm 244 INDEX A D conversion enable disable function 89 A D conversion enable disable setting 213 A D conversion method 0000 02s 95 Alarm code list scs a0a ie eats Wea antes Bes 180 Alert output flag 2 0 0 0 0 00 cee eee 203 Alert output function process alarm 105 Alert output setting 200008 217 Alert output signal 0 2000000 e 193 Alert output signal assignment 208 ALM LED Siac pcan Meta kG ak ee ie GIS ee ies ol ee eae 21 Applicable DIN rail model compliant with IEC 60715 blo Bt fates ot
30. processing g 1 I I e e v 4 I Extension A D converter CH4 i a H t module conversion enabled Conversion Conversion Conversion Conversion Processing r 7 R A channels CH1 to CH4 processing processing processing processing time Sampling period of the main A D converter module 1ms x 4 4ms Sampling period of the extension A D converter module 1ms x 4 4ms 92 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS Point If the number of conversion enabled channels is different between a main A D converter module and an extension A D converter module the main A D converter module and the extension A D converter module perform A D conversion at each different sampling period Ex Assuming the following settings e Conversion speed setting 100us e Conversion enabled channels of the main A D converter module CH1 CH2 CH3 number of conversion enabled channels 3 e Conversion enabled channels of the extension A D converter module CH1 CH2 number of conversion enabled channels 2 Sampling period of the main A D converter module 100us 100us 100us 100us 100us 100us 100us 100us e 5 am 22 KK rrr 3 22 Kerr Main A D converter module conversion enabled channels CH1 to CH3 i Conversion processing Conversion processing Conversion processing Conversion processing Conversion processing Conversion processing
31. 080972ENG 13JZ54 MELSEC iQ R Ethernet CC Link IE User s Manual Startup SH 081256ENG 13JX09 MELSEC iQ R CC Link IE Field Network User s Manual Application SH 081259ENG 13JX18 MELSEC iQ R Inter Module Synchronization Function Reference Manual SH 081401ENG MELSEC Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User s Manual Network IB 0300203 1XB957 MELSEC Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User s Manual Positioning Control IB 0300202 1XB956 CC Link IE Field Network Remote I O Module User s Manual SH 081114ENG 13JZ82 CC Link IE Field Network Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual SH 081453ENG 13JX27 2 Operating manual Manual name lt manual number model code gt GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common SH 080779ENG 13JU63 GX Works3 Operating Manual SH 081215ENG Description Overview of the CC Link IE Field Network and specifications procedures before operation system configuration installation wiring settings functions programming and troubleshooting of the QJ71GF11 T2 Overview of the CC Link IE Field Network and specifications procedures before operation system configuration installation wiring settings functions programming and troubleshooting of the LJ71GF11 T2 Specifications procedures before operation system configuration wiring and communication examples of Ethernet CC Link IE Controller Network and CC Link IE Field Network Functions parameter settings progr
32. 155 Programming procedure 000005 156 PNV LE Dirr e oa Sicken N a Ab ta eas Ado hae 21 Range setting 0 00 214 Range switching function 99 Remote READY i5 gxteuwiarnd ue ee dee ete fe 192 Replacing the module 00000 46 Requirements to compliance with the Low Voltage Directive reniir RY eh eh RG ae ee 240 RUN CED corea Gomis a we See Mla eck S 21 23 Sampling processing 00000 eee eee 95 Scaling enable disable setting 219 Scaling function 2 0 0 0 00 eee eee 108 SEl SEE BUHO eas taata haba ot cae be ttc 21 SH TUM CHO are oea tatea ieee a a atA 113 Station number setting 0 4 50 Station number setting switch 20 Supported master station 0 49 Supported software package 49 System configuration 0000 0a 48 Terminal block for analog input signals 21 23 Terminal block for external power supply and FG 23 Terminal block for module power supply and FG 21 TERMINAMCOVEL lt i i k dk cca ea ates ees 21 23 NCTM S ape dead A eesti ate a semi a aa aoa aed 12 Time averi see ates os Bae ened Ce 95 Trigger conversion completed clear request 200 Trigger conversion completed flag 194 Trigger conversion function 127 Trigger conversion request 0 199 Trigger conversion signal assignment 206 Troubleshooting se 492064 e
33. 3 Alarm Code List 11 3 1 Here is the list of alarm codes Alarm code hexadecimal Process alarm OAAOIH Minor error occurrence Input signal error 0BA OH Minor error p 19 detection 11 3 2 Here is the list of alarm codes Alarm code hexadecimal Process alarm 1AA0OH Minor error occurrence Input signal error 1BAOH Minor error P 9 detection 180 Main A D converter module Classification Alarm name Description and cause A process alarm has occurred O indicates the number of the channel where a process alarm has occurred A indicates the status as follows 0 Process alarm upper limit 1 Process alarm lower limit An input signal error has occurred O indicates the number of the channel where an input signal error has occurred A indicates the status as follows 3 Disconnection detection This alarm code is stored when an input signal error is detected according to the setting of the input signal error detection function Extension A D converter module Classification Alarm name Description and cause A process alarm has occurred O indicates the number of the channel where a process alarm has occurred A indicates the status as follows 0 Process alarm upper limit 1 Process alarm lower limit An input signal error has occurred O indicates the number of the channel where an input signal error has occurred A indicates the status as follows 3 Disconnection detection This a
34. Appendix 5 Accuracy of A D Conversion 0 0 0 0 0 cc eee eee eee Appendix 6 Processing Time of CC Link IE Field Network 0 0 0 0 0 0c eee eee Appendix 7 EMC and Low Voltage Directives 0 0 cc eee eee Appendix 7 1 Measures to comply with the EMC Directive 0 0 0 0 cee eee Appendix 7 2 Requirements to compliance with the Low Voltage Directive Appendix 8 How to Check Serial Number and Function Version 0000000 eae Appendix 9 Comparison with NZ2GF2B 60AD4 0 0 0 0 ee Appendix 9 1 Comparison of performance specifications 0 0 0 0 eee eee Appendix 9 2 Functional comparison 0 ee ete teen Appendix 9 3 About replacement from NZ2GF2B 60AD4 to NZ2GF2BN 60AD4 Appendix 10 External DimensionS a na n ee he ees bee Be eed ee eb he eee INDEX REVISIONS WARRANTY Appendix 10 1 Main A D converter module 0 0 0 0 ee eee Appendix 10 2 Extension A D converter module 0 0 ee eee TRADEMARKS 32252225 aa a te Seite oe ee arene ened Bue Be eed 166 MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION In this manual pages are organized and the symbols are used as shown below The following illustration is for explanation purpose only and should not be referred to as an actual documentation dia CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS is used for Te window names and items 7 1 1 Setting method The chapter of 1 Settin
35. CH4 Process alarm upper upper limit value address 011EH 021EH Alert output flag RWrB RWr1B corresponding to each channel turns to Alarm ON 1 e Ofthe A D conversion enabled channels and the alert output enabled channels an alert detected even in one channel results in Alert output signal RX18 RX28 being turned on b Clearing Alert output flag e When the digital operation value returns within the setting range Alert output flag RWrB is automatically cleared e Turning on and off Initial data setting request flag RY9 results in this flag being cleared c Device number The device numbers of this remote register are as follows Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 7 CHO Conversion value shift amount Set the shifting amount to conversion value that is to be used for the shift function in signed 16 bit binary The digital operation values after shift and add are stored to CHO Digital operation value RWr2 to RWr5 RWr12 to RWr15 For details on the shift function refer to the following e Shift Function Page 113 Section 8 12 Remote register name a Setting range Setting range is 32768 to 32767 b Enabling the setting Once a value is set the conversion value shift amount is valid regardless of turning on and off Initial data setting request flag RY9 203 siaisibay a oweyY jo sjiejaq Z xilpueddy c Device number The device numbers
36. CHU Difference conversion state flag RX14 to RX17 RX24 to RX27 e Before CHO A D conversion completed flag RX10 to RX13 RX20 to RX23 turns on from off by turning on Initial data setting request flag RY9 from off changing CHO Difference conversion trigger RY 14 to RY17 RY24 to RY27 from No request OFF to Trigger request ON results in operation with the difference conversion reference value taking on the digital operation value at the time when CHO A D conversion completed flag RX10 to RX13 RX20 to RX23 turns on from off UO I OUN 4 UOISISAUOD SOUTZIONIG pL 125 126 c How the maximum value minimum value operates When the difference conversion starts the maximum value and the minimum value of the values resulting from the difference conversion are stored in Maximum value and Minimum value Turning on Maximum value minimum value reset request RY1D RY2D allows the maximum value and the minimum value after the start of the difference conversion to be checked Not turning on Maximum value minimum value reset request RY1D RY2D causes the maximum and minimum values before the difference conversion and the maximum and minimum values after the difference conversion to be mixed up CHU Difference conversion trigger ON RY14 to RY17 RY24 to RY27 OFF i 9950 X10001 10000X10210X10510 12000X12100X13250X9950 10100 RWG to RWIS RWG O RWB 0 X 0 0000 X10000X10000 10000X10000X10000 000010000 RW2 to RWIS RW
37. D converter module REMFR instruction completed flag M311 Main A D converter module REMFR instruction completed with error flag M320 Extension A D converter module Maximum value minimum value read flag M330 Extension A D converter module REMFR instruction completed flag M331 Extension A D converter module REMFR instruction completed with error flag SM400 Always ON SB47 Baton pass status of own station SB49 Data link status of own station master station SWOA 0O Baton pass status of each station station number 1 SWOBO0 0 Data link status of each station station number 1 NO Nesting station number 1 160 CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING 5 Setting procedure Connect GX Works2 to the master station to set up the settings 1 Create a project on GX Worksz2 For PLC Series select QCPU Q mode and for PLC Type select Q1Q0UDH XD Project gt New 2 Open the network parameter setting window and configure the settings as shown below X Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET JV Set network configuration setting in CC IE Field configuration window Mosier T eee CCE Red easter siatoy few ee 9 dwexy weibold 6 161 3 Open the CC IE Field Configuration window and set up the configuration and station number of a slave station as shown below SESE button H i CCIE Field Configuration Edit View Close with Discarding the Setting Close with Refl
38. For the current input always connect the terminals V and I referring to the following e Wiring of External Device and Terminal Block 1 gt Page 63 Section 6 6 When the time average processing is selected set the value to be not less than Four times x Sampling period If the condition above is not met O is stored into the digital operation value Connect the AG terminal and the external device GND If the network synchronous communication setting is changed turn off and on the power or perform remote reset For the combined use of the CC Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function and the inter module synchronization function on the MELSEC iQ R series prepare an inter module synchronous interrupt program For the inter module synchronous interrupt program refer to the following MELSEC iQ R Inter Module Synchronization Function Reference Manual If the digital operation value cannot be read even after the above actions are taken the failure of the main A D converter module is a possible cause Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 186 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 When an A D conversion completed flag does not turn on in the normal mode Check item Action Does any input signal error occur Check Input signal error detection flag RWrA 3 When the digital operation value is out of the accuracy range Check item Action Is any measure against noise taken Take anti noise mea
39. GTI Ste rare ieee pee rk E E are i cea naa ea ar ere w a eta Ae Kary WRT en ee Gay ee ee T MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION Aree a a a a miu a e i eee he cla ee aa E 11 E ER M SAET ENE a E EE DEE A AA NA NTE DEN ER EE EI DEAT E EAS N EE NEA 12 PACKING ESTESE EA E E EE ARE ARS RE E EA R TE 14 CHAPTER 1 A D CONVERTER MODULE 15 Tat ANP DIC AMON eene E e S A E A E NRR RANE RNE E RE RIN ERE 15 T2 FST LO gt Co n tee e a gO ne r a a a a a RR a E ce oe 16 CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES 20 2 1 Main A D Converter Module aaa a aaa a a a a a eee eae 20 2 2 Extension A D Converter Module 000 ee ee ee eee ae 23 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 24 3 1 General Specifications seuda ee fet a a inked tee ete ihe ae ee 24 3 2 Performance Specifications sa osc eee esac Sek eew se OH eos pie lews ow hee Sees i 25 3 2 1 Main A D converter module oonan anaana bee oe es oe a ee a ol oe OS ee 25 3 2 2 Extension A D Converter Module 0000 cee ee eae 27 3 3 Howto Calculate Current Consumption n naaa aaan aaea ee ee eens 29 3 4 FUNCION MAIS crates eaae or oes a A aoe a ee a n deka ee ee ae T 30 oo Listo Remo VO SignalS 7 122 252450 iene doe te neh ete nc ae het te eased 32 3 5 1 Main A D converter module 0 00 ee eee ee eee 33 3 5 2 Extension A D converter module 000 ee ee eee ae 34 3 6 List of Remote ReOISIClS s 223 2204 Gees AL eee telah ote ee etiee eee ee dad 35 3 6 1 Main A D converter module
40. GX Works2 as the engineering tool 1 Establish a connection between GX Works2 and the CPU module 2 Goto the menu of GX Works2 and start up the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics TT Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics CIE Field Diagnostics Oe mg a a E a o a S o o o o o clect Diagnostics Destination Module Module 1 Network No 1 Change Module ane Station No 1 Error Monitoring Stop Monitor Sto By Staton Te Total Slave Stations Total Slave Stations Current Link Number of Station Set In Parameter 1 Connected Scan Time 1 ms Errors Detected 1 Hide Disconnected Station Data link unperfi a I I I St I Master 0 Remote 1 I e a I I I I I I I 4 e eee ee e M Operation Test E Communication Test Check the transient communication route from the connected I station to the destination station IP Communication Test Check the communication route whether you can reach I communication target station from the specified station Cable Test Check the cable status between the connected station and I the destination station I Link Start Stop Start or stop the network data link l Information Confirmation Set i 4 Network Event History Access the network the event history log l l I I I I 4 s a a Ext Base1 Reserved Station View reserved station numbers and temporarily enable Function Enable rese
41. again 67 68 e Wiring method 1 Loosen the terminal screw A round solderless Empl tive ma m e ET terminal can be connected as it is TAS Round solderless terminal Point Avoid contact of the terminal and the screw with oil Failure to do so may damage the screw The number of the inserted applicable solderless terminals must be two or less When inserting two applicable solderless terminals insert them back to back Otherwise the screw cannot be tightened possibly causing damage to it Tighten the terminal screw with an applicable screwdriver Tightening with an inapplicable screwdriver may damage the screw CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS This chapter describes how to set up various settings of the A D converter module 7 1 Parameter Settings Set the parameter of this module with the network parameter written to the CPU module of the master station For the setting procedure of the master station refer to the following LA User s manual for the master local module used Place a checkmark in the Set the network configuration settings in CC IE Field configuration window box on the MELSECNET CC IE Ethernet Module Configuration window in advance Network Parameter MELSECNET CC IE Ethernet Module Configuration Set network configuration setting in CC IE Field configuration window To select the main A D converter module in t
42. allow the D LINK LED to light up 50 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6 2 Installation Environment and Installation Position 6 2 1 Installation environment 1 Installation location Do not install the A D converter module in places where e Ambient temperature is outside the range of 0 to 55 C e Ambient humidity is outside the range of 5 to 95 RH e Condensation occurs due to rapid temperature change e Corrosive gas or combustible gas is present e There are a high level of conductive powder such as dust and iron powder oil mist salinity or organic solvent e It is exposed to direct sunlight e A strong electric field or strong magnetic field is generated and e The module is subject to vibration and shock 2 Installation surface Install the A D converter module on a flat surface Unevenness on the installation surface causes application of an excessive force to the printed circuit board which may lead to a malfunction 6 2 2 Installation position When installing the A D converter module in a control panel provide a clearance of at least 60mm from the surroundings including adjacent structures and modules to ensure good ventilation and easy module change Ys 60mm or longer 60mm or longer 60mm or longer or longer UOIISO UOl E e SU pue JUSWUOJIAUT uonejesuj Z7 9 51 6 2 3 Installation direction The A D converter module can b
43. are invalid O indicates the number of the channel that has been incorrectly set Correct the settings in CH1 Process alarm lower 4 Process alarm A indicates that the set values are in one of lower limit value address 010FH to CH4 o6 AOH Moderate error l oh a setting error the following conditions Process alarm upper upper limit value address Process alarm lower lower limit value gt 011EH Process alarm lower upper limit value Process alarm lower upper limit value gt Process alarm upper lower limit value Process alarm upper lower limit value gt Process alarm upper upper limit value Reset the mode switch address 0000H to either 0730H Moderte eni Mode switch setting A value out of the range is set in mode switch 7 an 174 error address OOOOH e Trigger conversion mode 1H e Automatical judgment mode 9H CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code hexadecimal Classification Errorname Description and cause Action A value out of the range is set for a bit Set the value in the channel where an error has Input signal error corresponding to any channel of Input signal occurred in Input signal error detection setting o810 Moderate error detection setting error detection setting address 0109H address 0109H to either of the following out of range O indicates the number of the channel where e Disable OH an error has occurred e Disconnection detection 4H Disconnection detection 4H has been set
44. conversion processing of the A D converter module synchronizes with the synchronization period set in the master station For the conversion timing refer to the following e K Page 136 Section 8 16 3 Cannot be used The setting of CHO Shifting amount to conversion value RWw2 to RWw5 RWw12 to RWw15 will be ignored Cannot be used Turning on CHO Difference conversion trigger RY14 to RY17 RY24 to RY27 from off does not allow difference conversion to start The extension I O module can be used but input and output of the extension I O module is not synchronized with the operation cycle of the simple motion module The setting of Cyclic data update watch time setting address 0007H will be ignored b Restrictions on the number of A D conversion enabled channels There are restrictions on the number of conversion enabled channels for the A D converter module depending on the settings of the synchronization period of the master station and Conversion speed setting of the main A D converter module For details refer to the following L Page 140 Section 8 16 4 c Restrictions on the network parameter settings RWw RWr In the RWw RWr settings of network parameters set the network parameters so that RWwF RWrF are assigned 135 UONOUN4 UOIJEDIUNWWOD SNOUDIUOUAS YIOMION plal J1 YUIT DD 948 3 How the CC Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function operates At every synchronization period of t
45. default value is Sampling processing OH for all channels c Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory addresses of this area are as follows Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Remote buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Averaging process specification 0104H 0204H Poi oint Inthe trigger conversion mode or synchronous communication mode the setting of Averaging process setting address 0104H and 0204H is ignored and the sampling processing is performed A channel to which a value out of the above range is written operates with the sampling processing 215 Aowa yng sJoWsY jo sjiejaq xilpueddy 216 14 CHO Time average Count average Moving average This area is used for setting the time average count average or moving average for each channel where the averaging processing is specified The following shows the setting range Processing method Setting value Time average 2 to 5000 ms Count average 4 to 65000 times Moving average 2 to 128 times 4 For time average set a value of 4 x Sampling period ms or more A value less than this criterion results in the error code 0200H 1200H being stored in Latest error code RWr0 Error flag RXA turning on and the ERR LED lighting up In CHO Digital operation value RWr2 to RWr5 RWr12 to RWr15 O is stored 2 Setting data other than the above results in the error code 0300H and 1300H or 0310H and 1
46. enable disable setting he OH 4 D conversion enable disable setting CH 4 0 conversion enable digable setting eee OHS A D conversion enable disable setting Eos GH4 4 1 conversion enable disable settine 0 Enable 0 Enable be 0 Enable E i acne 118 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS In Basic module parameter set CHO Scaling enable disable setting to 0 Enable E Scaling function f le i GHI Scaling enable disable setting 1 Disable fs GHI Sealing upper limit value H GH1 Scaling lower limit value 0o GH Sealine enable disable setting 1 Digable I Disable In Basic module parameter set the values in CHO Scaling upper limit value and CHO Scaling lower limit value M E Scaling function eee GH1 Scaling enable disable setting i Disable Enable ee GHI Scaling upper limit value ae a o a eee GH Scaling lower limit value ns ST In Basic module parameter set CHO Digital clipping enable disable setting to 0 Enable E Digital clipping function H OH1 Digital clipping enable disable setting 1 Digable tee GH Digital clipping enable disable setting 1 Disable H GH Digital clipping enable disable setting 1 Disable a 0 Enab H GH4 Digital clipping enable disable setting 1 Disable PLE Digable 119 uonoun4 uddi eyid 48 4 Example of the combined use of the digital clipping function the scaling fun
47. error code 0173H being stored in Latest error code RWr0 Error flag RXA turning on and the ERR LED lighting up with the previously set operation 209 Aowa JOLING BJOWSY jo sjiejaq xIpueddy 7 Warning flag assignment Assign Warning flag RX7 to Remote output RY of the extension output module using the external signal assignment function When a minor error occurs assigned Remote output RY is turned on a Setting range With the head of Remote output RY of the main A D converter module as a starting point 0000H set the device number for Remote output RY of the connected extension output module When Warning flag RX7 is assigned to Remote output RY numbered 6H as counted from the head OH of the extension output module Main A D converter module Extension output module OH to 6H to FH OH to 1FH 20H to 26H to 2FH Remote output RY numbered 6H as counted from the head of the extension output module corresponds to Remote output RY numbered 26H as counted from the head of the main A D converter module Thus set 26H for Warning flag assignment address 0006H b Enabling the setting Turn on and off Initial data setting request flag RY9 to enable the setting c Default value The default value is No assignment FFFFH d Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory address of this area is as follows Remote buffer memory name Main A D converter module Extension A D conver
48. failure occurred in the main analog module or the e Replace either of the main analog module and the extension A D converter module extension A D converter module with another module e If this error persists the hardware failure is a possible cause Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 184 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 5 Unit Test The purpose of a unit test is to check if there is any abnormality in the main A D converter module 1 Turn off the module power supply 2 Connect the PORT1 and PORT2 connectors of the main A D converter module with an Ethernet cable 3 Set up the station number setting switch as follows x10 TEST X1 0 4 Turnon the module power supply 5 Unit test begins The MODE LED flashes during the unit test a ON BEBO OAS 6 Upon the completion of the unit test the MODE LED When completed successfully turns off ON PW RUN MODE DLINK ERR ALM a e When completed normally the ERR LED does not turn on gt Flasnin BEUUU OD OFF remaining off e When completed with an error the ERR LED turns on If Wh sted wilh the unit test is completed with an error replace the en completed with an error P Z ON Ethernet cable and run the test again If completed with an G BZ PW RUN MODE DLINK ALM L Flashing error again the hardware failure in the main A D converter BEUUZ LU OFF module is a possible cause Please consult your local Mitsubishi representati
49. lower limit value lower upper limit value and lower lower limit value CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 6 Setting procedure The setting procedure for the main A D converter module is as follows 1 Set Method selection to Parameter write T CC IE Field Configuration window gt Select the main A D converter module from List of stations gt CC IE Field Configuration gt Online gt Parameter Processing of Slave Station 2 In Basic module parameter set CHO A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable G A D conversion enable disable setting eee GHI A D conversion enable disable setting H GH2 A D conversion enable disable setting o H GH3 4 D conversion enable disable setting 0 Enable DOE ha GHA A D conversion enahleddisahle settine i Frable I Disable 3 In Basic module parameter set CHO Alert output setting to 0 Enable E Alert output function bee GH Alert output setting 1 Digable GHI Process alarm upper upper limit value ee GH1 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 2 DPE fee HT Process alarm lower upper limit value o CU LE Ditties 4 in Basic module parameter specify the values for CHO Process alarm upper upper limit value CHO Process alarm upper lower limit value CHO Process alarm lower upper limit value and CHO Process alarm lower lower limit value E Alert output function H GHI Alert output setting 1 Disable a iia SSS
50. main A D converter module with the station number that is set up in the network configuration settings of the master station or in the CC IE Field configuration In the network configuration settings of the master station change the station type to the remote device station Change the setting of reserved ignored error station to other than the reserved station in the network configuration settings of the master station Check the link status through CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and start the link when the data link is stopped The setting range for the station number setting switch is 1 to 120 Set the number between 1 and 120 Action e Check if 10OOOBASE T compliant Ethernet cables are used QA User s manual for the master local module used e Check if the station to station distance is 100m or less e Check if the Ethernet cables are not disconnected e Check if a 1O00BASE T compliant switching hub is used QA User s manual for the master local module used e Check if the power supply of the switching hub is turned on Check if the power supplies of the other stations are turned on Change the mode of the master station to Online Check the wiring condition of the Ethernet cables When the loopback function is enabled check if the ring topology is correctly configured for the port where the L ER LED is on LA User s manual for the master local module used 8 When the LINK LED turns off Check item Are Ethe
51. not supported by the A D converter PEZON period setting error iadul pp 7 of the A D converter module or perform remote l reset Synchronous o Take measures against noise on the transmission ere Synchronous communication with the master OE30H 2 Moderate error communication path and then turn off and on the module power station has failed for a certain period of time error 2 supply or perform remote reset Take the following actions and then turn off and on The number of A D conversion enabled the power supply or perform remote reset Excessive number i x channels is too large to accommodate all the e Reduce the number of conversion enabled OE40H 2 Moderate error of conversion a channels in the synchronization period set in channels enabled channels La the master station e Change the synchronization period of the master station to a longer period Check whether the extension modules are in contact with each other and whether the extension The extension module is not connected Extension module i module is a connectable module If the same error 1FOOH Major error properly or the connected extension module connection error i occurs again the failure of the module is a itself is not supported possible cause Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative es e Check the state of the external power supply of The external power supply monitoring function the extension output module External power is en
52. o SSA FUNCUON senes ous a tye otha eh gare S ee ania hed ee ARE ea ee aie ee eee ae 113 8 13 Digital Clipping FUNCION 2 reana 2 dle 5 4 Steers Ai OE lok sted Sea aloe we oe ae 117 8 14 Difference Conversion Function 2 02 e eee 122 8 10 Trigger Conversion FUNGON re 2 5 34 sero t reed Dead baa Be eterna eae aE E 127 8 16 CC Link IE Field Network Synchronous Communication Function 135 Si Error NOUNGatION FUNCHON lt s 3at code eet ase a otal oie ee fates 142 8 18 Functions with an Extension Module Connected 000 cee eee 145 8 18 1 Functions with an extension I O module connected 000 ee eee eee 145 8 18 2 Functions with the extension A D converter module connected 150 8 18 3 Functions with the extension D A converter module connected 5 151 8 19 CC Link IE Field Network Diagnostic Function 0 0 00 cee 152 CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING 155 9 1 Precautions for Programming 2 s2 3ceeee oie bee ee ceed ee dpe eerie twee deed 155 92 Programming Procedure 2 03 tog ew bbw ehh torrent bk atk eh ete eee bt aod et EA 156 93 Progam Exa MDE r aae nine A ele hie hse eS WEE SEALE Sere BAS HG 156 10 CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 1 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 0 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 1 TROUBLESHOOTING How to Check Error Codes and Alarm Codes 00 00 eee eee eee eee Eror Code Si fab
53. of this remote register are as follows Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module S CH1 cH2 cH3 cH4 ch cH2 cH3 c CHO Conversion value shift amount RWw12 RWw13 RWw14 RWw15 204 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Details of Remote Buffer Memory This section describes the details of the remote buffer memory 1 Mode switch Set the mode for all channels Mode Normal mode OH Trigger conversion mode 1H Automatical judgment mode 9H Setting value Setting a value other than the above results in the error code 0730H being stored in Latest error code RWr0 Error flag RXA turning on and the ERR LED lighting up with Automatical judgment mode 9H set up a Enabling the setting Turn on and off Initial data setting request flag RY9 2 Check that 0920H is stored in Latest warning code RWr1 3 Turn off and on the power supply b Default value The default value is Automatical judgment mode 9H c Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory address of this area is as follows Remote buffer memory name Main A D converter module Mode switch 0000H 2 Conversion speed switch Set the conversion speed for all channels Conversion speed 400us channel OH 1ms channel 1H 100us channel 2H Extension A D converter module Setting value In trigger conversion mode or synchronous communication mode setting the conversion speed to 1ms channel 1H results in operati
54. off during Conversion completed ON of Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 the A D conversion is performed and the digital operation value is updated e Turning on and off Initial data setting request flag RYQ results in Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 turning off sain gt Controlled by the A D converter module Controlled by the program Trigger conversion request ON ON RY19 RY29 OFF OFF I I CHU Digital operation value RWr2 to RWr5 RWr12 to RWr15 a AD Cone ee Value Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 Trigger conversion completed clear request RY1A RY2A For the trigger conversion function refer to the following e Trigger Conversion Function Page 127 Section 8 15 a Device number The device numbers of this input signal are as follows Signal name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 194 APPENDICES 9 Input signal error detection signal a ON of Input signal error detection signal With Input signal error detection setting address 0109H 0209H set to Disconnection detection 4H this signal turns on at the detection of a disconnection in any of the A D conversion enabled channels b OFF of Input signal error detection signal After the analog input value returns to a value that is larger than the criteria of disconnection detection 2mA or lower or 0 5V or
55. on To clear Latest error code RWr0 turn on and off Error clear request flag RYA e With a moderate error ares gt Controlled by the A D converter module Controlled by the program I I I I Error flag RXA Error clear request flag RYA Remote READY RXB 4 OFF A e With a major error AE gt Controlled by the A D converter module gt Controlled by the program Latest error code RWr0 0000H Error code Error flag RXA In the case of a major error the error is not cleared by an error clear request Error clear request flag RYA sjeuBblis indul 3ow y xipueddy s euBlS O I a oWsyY Jo sjlejaq X pu ddy ON Remote READY RXB OFF a Error history The error history is not cleared even if Error clear request flag RYA is turned on and off To clear the error history set 1 in Error history clear command address 1000H For the error history clear refer to the following e Error history clear command Page 223 Appendix 3 24 b Device number The device number of this input signal is as follows Signal name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Error flag RXA 191 4 Remote READY This signal is used as an interlock condition when the master station reads writes data to from the remote register or remote buffer memory areas of the A D converter module Upon turning on the module power supply Remote READY RXB
56. period ms O indicates the number of the channel where an error has occurred The averaging count value set in CHO Time average Count average Moving average 0300H Woden iro Count average address 0105H to 0108H is outside the Set the averaging count to a value in the range of setting out of range range of 4 to 65000 4 to 65000 O indicates the number of the channel where an error has occurred The moving average count value set in CHO Time average Count average Moving average 4 Moving average address 0105H to 0108H is outside the Set the moving average count to a value in the 0310H Moderate error setting out of range range of 2 to 128 range of 2 to 128 O indicates the number of the channel where an error has occurred Set one of the following values in Conversion 4 Conversion speed The value set in Conversion speed setting SPARA SND cece BN N 0360H Moderate error l e 400us channel OH setting out of range address 0001H is other than 0 and 2 e 1ms channel 1H e 100us channel 2H The user range setting value has been set to a 4 Offset gain setting valle were Hie ees a a Correct the setting so that the offset value is QASEN Moderate GIOT value inverted ereater MaN ine Gall vale smaller than the gain value O indicates the number of the channel where an error has occurred The settings in CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value address 010FH to CH4 Process alarm upper upper limit value address 011EH
57. related to the connection of the Drive mode Reference extension A D converter module Processing time 100us arises in the period from the completion Normal mode of conversion processing of each channel to the initiation of Page 91 Section 8 5 1 2 conversion processing of the next channel Processing time 100us arises in the period from the completion Trigger conversion mode of conversion processing of each channel to the start of Page 127 Section 8 15 conversion processing of the next channel 150 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 1 8 3 Functions with the extension D A converter module connected With the extension D A converter module connected A D conversion processing of four channels and D A conversion processing of four channels is possible 1 Available function with the extension D A converter module connected Here is the list of the available function with the extension D A converter module connected Function Description Monitors the on off state of the external power supply of the extension D A converter module indicating the monitored state by the RUN LED and External power supply READY flag RX2F of the extension D A converter module For details refer to the following CC Link IE Field Network Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual External power supply monitoring function 2 Supplementary information related to the connection of the extension D A converter module Here is the list of the supplementary
58. setting function 145 Input signal error detection flag 202 Input signal error detection function 101 Input signal error detection setting 217 Input signal error detection signal 195 Input signal error detection signal assignment 207 Installation and wiring aaao aaa aaan aaaea 50 Installation direction n on anaa aaaea 52 Installation environment n anana aana 51 Installation environment and installation position 51 Installation in a control panel 236 Installation position 000 ee eee 51 WER SEE coe cies ire tht re ee aay ate et eae han tee dees 21 Latest error code nannaa aedeagal eae 201 Latest warning code 2 000 201 Laying Ethernet cables 004 62 HUNK CED ee ne ee A a are a OSA 21 List of remote buffer memory areas 38 List of remote I O signals 0 4 32 List of remote registers 02000 35 Maintenance and inspection 166 Maximum and minimum values 88 Maximum station to station distance for an Ethernet cable maximum cable length 62 Maximum value minimum value hold function 100 Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag A tea ha oe ate ae Gian had ey eat ee 196 Maximum value minimum value reset request 200 Measures to comply with the EMC Directive 234 MODE EDs 2 8 64 uate Gun ai a Bia 6 E Bees 21
59. shift function and difference conversion function the scale conversion shift addition and difference conversion are executed on the value after digital clipping 121 uonoun4 uddi eyid 48 8 1 4 Difference Conversion Function The digital operation value at the start of this function is treated as 0 reference value Thereafter the difference between the actual digital operation value and the reference value is stored as the digital operation value Digital operation value 16000 CHUL Digital operation value RWr2 to RWr5 RWr12 to RWr15 2000 W CHO Difference conversion trigger RY14 to RY17 RY24 to RY27 CHO Digital output value CHUO Difference conversion reference value RWr6 to RWr9 RWr16 to RWr19 RWr2 to RWS RW fo RWIS A4800 0 X2000K 2000X X 6000X6000 CHO Difference conversion state flag RX14 to RX17 RX24 to RX27 OFF OFF 1 How the difference conversion function When the difference conversion starts the digital operation value at that time the data stored inside the A D converter module before difference conversion is determined as the difference conversion reference value The value acquired by subtracting the difference conversion reference value from the digital operation value is stored in CHO Digital operation value RWr2 to RWr5 RWr12 to RWr15 CHO Digital operation value RWr2 to RWr5 RWr12 to RWr15 at
60. slave station may be change by the execution of the process Parameter write Also it may overwrite the device value of the PLC CPU refreshing the remote VO and remote registers Please confirm safety before the execution Please confirm that the connected PLC ts correct Please confirm that the CC IE Field module is set correctly Please confirm that the target slave station is correct Do you want to execute 11 Click button 12 The parameters are written to the A D converter module Setting the module parameters of the slave station is complete CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS 7 3 Offset Gain Setting lf the user range is necessary set up the offset gain setting by following the instructions as illustrated below Note that using the factory default range does not require the offset gain setting 1 Turn off the module power supply 2 Set x10 of the station number setting switch to O G 3 Turn on the module power supply and check that the LEDs are in the following state RUN LED Off O G LED On 4 Select the setting target using SET SEL button button button User range setting 1 10 to 10V LA BA V Il ath 2 3 4 OFFSET GAIN CH1 Offset 7 V Il c 2 3 4 OFFSET GAIN CH1 Gain E CH2 Offset CH2 Gain V 1 2 3 4 OFFSET GAIN CH3 Offset z V Il a 2 3 4 OFFSET GAIN CH3 Gain E V Il ah ee e r E TNS CH4 Offset RNa V Il c1 2 3 4 OFFSET GAIN CH4 Gain E User range set
61. the setting of Ext module 1 CHO A D conversion enable disable setting 8 5 Conversion Speed Switch Function Conversion speed of the main A D converter module can be selected from the following three rates e 100us e 400us e 1ms 1 Setting procedure 1 Set Method selection to Parameter write X CC IE Field Configuration window gt Select a main A D converter module from List of stations gt CC IE Field Configuration gt Online gt Parameter Processing of Slave Station 2 In Station parameter from Conversion speed setting select the conversion speed uonouny ajqesiq e qeuy UOISIOAUOD ANY vg eee t a Ox FFF EL O fe PEPE Conversion speed setting he Trigger conversion signal assignment H Tnput signal error detection signal assignment ieee Alart mntmnt sianal socignmant 89 8 5 1 Conversion Speed and Sampling Period Conversion speed is the rate at which an A D converter module converts analog input values A sampling period is the period of conversion processing within the one channel A conversion period is the period of the update of a digital operation value with the A D conversion method sampling processing or averaging processing taken into account and is equivalent to an integral multiple of the sampling period I Page 95 Section 8 6 The following figure shows the relationship between conversion speed and a sampling period Conversion speed
62. to O9FFH System area 2560 to 4095 OAOOH to OFFFH Error history area Station based error history data 4096 to 4351 1000H to 10FFH Station based control data 4352 to 4607 1100H to 11FFH 4608 to 4863 1200H to 12FFH 4864 to 5375 1300H to 14FFH Station based parameter data Main module Parameter area Extension module 1 parameter data pf O O O N O E O Module control data Main module Module based control area Extension module 1 data System area 4 For the REMFR and REMTO instructions refer to the following A User s manual for the master local module used 2 For the access method refer to the following e Parameter area Page 69 Section 7 1 e Error history area Page 168 Section 11 1 38 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Point Do not access any system area using the REMFR or REMTO instruction Doing so may cause malfunction 3 7 1 Main A D converter module 1 Parameter area address 0000H to 04FFH For the parameter area parameters can be set by means of the CC IE Field configuration of the engineering tool or the REMTO instruction The parameters in the parameter area are backed up to the non volatile memory The parameters backed up to the non volatile memory are read out to the parameter area when the module power supply is turned off and on or the module is reset by remote reset For the parameters written from the parameter settings of the CC IE Field configurat
63. turning on and the ERR LED lighting up with the previously set operation 208 APPENDICES 6 Error flag assignment Assign Error flag RXA to Remote output RY of the extension output module using the external signal assignment function When a moderate error or major error occurs assigned Remote output RY is turned on a Setting range With the head of Remote output RY of the main A D converter module as a starting point 0000H set the device number for Remote output RY of the connected extension output module x When Error flag RXA is assigned to Remote output RY numbered 4H as counted from the head OH of the extension output module Main A D converter module Extension output module OH to 4H to OH to 1FH 20H to 24H to 2FH Remote output RY numbered 4H as counted from the head of the extension output module corresponds to Remote output RY numbered 24H as counted from the head of the main A D converter module Thus set 24H for Error flag assignment address 0005H b Enabling the setting Turn on and off Initial data setting request flag RYQ to enable the setting c Default value The default value is No assignment FFFFH d Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory address of this area is as follows Remote buffer memory name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Error flag assignment 0005H Point Setting a value out of the range results in the
64. value RWr2 to RWr5 RWr12 to RWr15 When the scaling function is used the conversion value shift amount is added to the value to which the scale conversion is performed The shift amount is added in every sampling cycle for sampling processing while it is added in every averaging process cycle for averaging processing The default value of the conversion value shift amount is 0 If a value is set to the conversion value shift amount this conversion value shift amount is added regardless of turning on and off Initial data setting request flag RY9Q UONOUNT HUS CLS 2 Setting procedure The setting procedure for the main A D converter module is as follows 1 Set Method selection to Parameter write XO CC IE Field Configuration window gt Select the main A D converter module from List of stations CC IE Field Configuration gt Online gt Parameter Processing of Slave Station 2 In Basic module parameter set CHO A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable M E A D conversion enable disable setting eee GHI 4 D conversion enable disable setting H GH2 A D conversion enable disable setting o i H GH3 4 D conversion enable disable setting 0 Enable DE ha GHA A D conversion enahleddizahle settine i Frable I Disable 3 Set the value to be added to CHO Shifting amount to conversion value RWw2 to RWw5 Item Setting range CHO Shifting amount to conversion value RWw2 t
65. warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3
66. 0 to 16000 0 5mV 10 to 10V 3 _ User range setting 2 4 4 16000 to 16000 0 25mV 5 to 5V 4 Set the offset value and gain value in the user range setting within the range satisfying the following conditions If the following conditions are not satisfied A D conversion may not be properly performed lt User range setting 1 gt e Setting range for offset value and gain value 10 to 10V e Gain value Offset value gt 8 0V e 10 433V gt Gain value Offset value x 2 lt User range setting 2 gt e Setting range for offset value and gain value 5 to 5V e Gain value Offset value gt 4 0V e 5 21V gt Gain value Offset value x 2 2 When the analog input value exceeds the range of digital output values the digital output value is fixed to the maximum or minimum value Digital output value Input range setting O o Mmm ___ O Maximum 10 to 10V User range setting 1 10 to 10v 3 16384 User range setting 2 5 to 5V 16383 0 to 5V 384 1 to 5V 3 The extension A D converter module does not support User range 1 and User range 2 230 APPENDICES Point Use the value within the practical analog input range and practical digital output range If a value is out of the range the maximum resolution and accuracy may not fall within the range of performance specifications Do not use the value in the dotted line region in the graph of voltage input characteristics Do not set the voltage
67. 000 1st storage a 2nd storage b 3rd storage c Time ms CH1 Digital operation T value RWr2 RWr12 eon 5 eee CH1 A D conversion completed flag RX10 RX20 Changes of data of CH1 Digital operation value RWr2 RWr12 1st storage a 2nd storage b 3rd storage c 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 3 4 5 6 4 4 4 3 Setting procedure The setting procedure for the main A D converter module is as follows a Sampling processing 1 Set Method selection to Parameter write XO CC IE Field Configuration window gt Select the main A D converter module from List of stations gt CC IE Field Configuration gt Online gt Parameter Processing of Slave Station 2 In Basic module parameter set CHO A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable G 4 D conversion enable disable setting eee OH A D conversion enable disable setting CH 4 0 conversion enable digable setting eee OHS A D conversion enable disable setting GH4 4 1 conversion enable disable setting Enable MEET i Frahle 3 In Basic module parameter set CHO Averaging process setting to 0 Sampling processing O Averaging process setting Ha GH Averaging process setting GHI Time average Gount average Moving average Ha GH Averaging process setting CH Time average Dount averages Moving average Ha IGHE Averaging process setting CHS Time average Dount average Moving average H Hd Ave
68. 0000H 1793 0701H CH1 Maximum value G 1794 0702H CH1 Minimum value es 1795 0703H CH2 Maximum value w Extension module 1 1796 0704H CH2 Minimum value SO Module based monitor 1797 0705H CH3 Maximum value od data 1798 0706H CH3 Minimum value SO 1799 0707H CH4 Maximum value sO 1800 0708H CH4 Minimum value SO 4 Value at the time of turning off and on the module power supply or at the time of remote reset 2 This shows whether reading writing data from to a program is possible R Readable W Writable V D DI D D D DIDID 3 Module control data area address 1200H to 12FFH Address Fa i Description Read Write 2 Type Extension module 1 Module based control 4608 to 4863 1200H to 12FFH System area data 4 Value at the time of turning off and on the module power supply or at the time of remote reset 2 This shows whether reading writing data from to a program is possible R Readable W Writable 45 se ly Kiowa JOJING sJOWSY JO si 7 E CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION This chapter describes the procedures before operation Check box Bn Setting a station number Set the station number of the main A D converter module When using an extension module connect the extension module to the main A D converter module After that mount the main A D converter module on a DIN rail Carry out wiring of a power supply Ethernet cables and external devices to the main A D convert
69. 00us channel and Not available 400us channel The following extension modules can be mounted e Extension input module The following extension modules can be mounted Support for extension modules e Extension output module e Extension input module e Extension A D converter module e Extension output module e Extension D A converter module 242 APPENDICES Appendix 9 3 About replacement from NZ2GF2B 60AD4 to NZ2GF2BN 60AD4 This section describes the information on replacing the NZ2GF2B 60AD4 with the NZ2GF2BN 60AD4 1 2 3 Integration into the existing system The terminal blocks of the NZ2GF2B 60AD4 can be installed into the NZ2GF2BN 60AD4 with the wiring left unchanged Reusing the programs Programs running in the NZ2GF2B 60AD4 can be reused as they are Precautions when replacing the NZ2GF2B 60AD4 with a serial number first five digits of 15101 or earlier The NZ2GF2B 60AD4 with a serial number first five digits of 15101 or earlier is the module designed before the addition of the CC Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function The remote buffer memory therefore differs in the following NZ2GF2B 60AD4 First five digits of the serial NZ2GF2B 60AD4 First five digits of the serial Item number are 151017 oreaniier number are 15102 or later NZ2GF2BN umber are o 60AD4 E 0 Normal coversion mode Setting values of Mode switch 0 Normal conversion mode default value
70. 06 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2 Removal procedure Remove the modules from the DIN rail in a procedure opposite to the mounting procedure 3 Applicable DIN rail model compliant with IEC 60715 e TH35 7 5Fe e TH35 7 5Al 4 Space between DIN rail mounting screws When installing a DIN rail tighten the screws at a pitch of 200mm or less 5 DIN rail stopper Use a stopper that is attachable to the DIN rail UO HE E SU 9 of 6 4 Wiring to Terminal Block for Module Power Supply and FG This section describes how to wire a terminal block for module power supply and FG to the main A D converter module Note that the descriptions are the same for the extension A D converter module 1 Tightening torque Tighten the terminal block screws within the following specified torque range Tightening the screws too much may damage the module case Screw type Tightening torque range Terminal block mounting screw M2 5 0 2 to 0 3N m Terminal screw M2 5 0 5 to 0 6N m 2 Suitable wire The table below shows the suitable wire for connection to the terminal block for module power supply and FG 20 to 16 AWG Stranded 75 C or higher 3 Installing and removing the terminal block To remove the terminal block loosen the terminal block mounting screw with a flathead screwdriver To install the terminal block tighten the terminal block mounting screw with a flathead screwdriver Failure to secure the termina
71. 0H hed Item Storage contents Storage example Error code The error code of the error that occurred is stored OAOOH OA01H OA02H OA03H OA04H OAOSH OAO6H OA07H OA08H OAO9H OAQAH to OAOFH Order of generation The order of error occurrence is stored 2H First two digits of the year Last o 9 2014H two digits of the year Month Date The items on the left are stored in BCD code 1101H Hour Minute 2 1330H Second OOH Fixed 2 5000H CH1 Digital operation value CH2 Digital operation value The value in CHO Digital operation value RWr2 to RWr5 RWr12 to RWr15 at CH3 Digital operation value the time of occurrence of an error is stored CH4 Digital operation value 4 This example assumes that a second error has occurred at 13 30 50 on November 1 2014 2 The clock information of the error that occurred is based on the clock information acquired from the CPU module of the master station When an error has occurred before the clock information is acquired from the CPU module the error time is not recorded Error history 2 to Error history 15 address 0A10H to OAEFRH are stored in the same format as that of Error history 1 address OAQOH to OAOFH For the error code refer to the following e Error Code List 1 gt Page 172 Section 11 2 a Storage order of the error history The latest error is stored in Error history 1 address OAOQOH to OAOFH Errors that occurred in the past are stored i
72. 2BN 60AD4 CC Link IE Field Network main analog digital converter module A generic term for the main A D converter module and main D A converter module The abbreviation for the NZ2GF2BN 60DA4 CC Link IE Field Network main digital analog converter module A module with the CC Link IE Field Network communication function which can be used as a single remote module A station that controls the entire network This station can perform cyclic transmission and transient transmission with all stations Only one master station can be used in a network A generic term for the CC Link IE Field Network master local module A generic term for the following modules e CC Link IE Field Network module e CC Link IE Controller Network module e Ethernet interface module e MELSECNET H module e MELSECNET 10 module A station that includes two or more network modules Data are passed through this station to stations on other networks The abbreviation for ZP REMFR Buffer memory in a remote device station A station that exchanges I O signals bit data and I O data word data with another station by cyclic transmission This station responds to a transient transmission request from another station A station that exchanges I O signals bit data with the master station by cyclic transmission Term Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote register RWr Remote register RWw REMTO Reserved station Return Simple motion module Slave sta
73. 2BN 60DA4 CC Link IE Field Network extension digital analog converter module A generic term for the extension input module and extension output module A generic term for extension modules where digital signals can be input A remote module with no CC Link IE Field Network communication function This module cannot be used as a single module However connecting the module to the main module will increase the number of I O points per station A generic term for extension modules where digital signals can be output The product name of the software package for the MELSEC programmable controllers Another term for the CC Link IE Field Network remote I O module A station that exchanges I O signals bit data and I O data word data with another station by cyclic transmission This station responds to a transient transmission request from another station and also issues a transient transmission request to another station A device RX RY RWr or RWw in a module on CC Link IE Field Network Word data that indicates the operating status and data link status of a module on CC Link IE Field Network Bit data that indicates the operating status and data link status of a module on CC Link IE Field Network A station that performs cyclic transmission and transient transmission with the master station and other local stations The station is controlled by programs in the CPU module or other equivalent modules on the station The abbreviation for the NZ2GF
74. 3 2 Extension A D converter module 1 Parameter area address 0200H to 02FFH Type Description Decimal Hexadecimal 0200H Extension module identification code 0201H System area 514 0202H A D conversion enable disable setting 0203H Range setting 0204H Averaging process setting 517 0205H CH1 Time average Count average Moving average 518 0206H rail average Count average Moving 519 0207H CH3 Time average Count average Moving average 520 0208H oe average Count average Moving 521 0209H Input signal error detection setting 020AH to 020DH_ System area 020EH Alert output setting 527 020FH CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value 528 0210H CH1 Process alarm lower upper limit value 529 0211H CH1 Process alarm upper lower limit value 530 0212H CH1 Process alarm upper upper limit value 531 0213H CH2 Process alarm lower lower limit value Extension module 539 0214H CH2 Process alarm upper lower limit value Module based parameter data 33 0215H 534 0216H 535 0217H 536 0218H 537 0219H 538 021AH 539 021BH 540 021CH 541 021DH 542 021EH 543 021FH 544 0220H 545 0221H 546 0222H 547 0223H 548 0224H 549 0225H 550 0226H 551 0227H 552 0228H 553 to 767 0229H to 02FFH CH2 Process alarm upper lower limit value i CH2 Process alarm upper upper limit value CH3 Process alarm lower lower limit value CH3 Process alarm lower upper limit value CH3 Process alarm upper lower limit value CH3 Process alarm upper upper limit valu
75. 310H being stored in Latest error code RWr0 Error flag RXA turning on and the ERR LED lighting up The A D conversion processing is performed with the settings just before the error a Enabling the setting Turn on and off Initial data setting request flag RY9 to enable the setting b Default value The default value is O for all channels c Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory addresses of this area are as follows aT aa A D converter are Extension A D converter module ial cua cut cH cHs c ec average Count average Moving o105H o106H 0107H 0108H 0205H 0206H 0207H 0208H Point By default O is set and so change the value according to the processing method For the channel where any value is set up setting the sampling processing results in the set value being ignored APPENDICES 15 Input signal error detection setting Set the condition for detecting an error of input signals for each channel b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to bO CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 Detection method for input signal error Setting value Disable OH Disconnection detection 4H a Enabling the setting Turn on and off Initial data setting request flag RYQ to enable the setting b Default value The default value is Disable OH for all channels c Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory addresses of this area are as follows Main A D converter module Extension A
76. 4 MITSUBISHI W NM ELECTRIC Mitsubishi Programmable Controller CC Link IE Field Network Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual NZ2GF2BN 60AD4 NZ2EX2B 60AD4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product only For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system refer to the user s manual for the CPU module used In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels N WARNING and N CAUTION WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under A CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions WARNING When a communication failure occurs in the network data in the master module are held Check Data link status each station SWOO
77. 5mV Voltage I O characteristics maximum resolution Ambient temperature Conversion 255 C accuracy Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Conversion speed Absolute maximum input Isolation method Withstand voltage Noise immunity External interface Applicable DIN rail 0 to 16000 0 to 20mA 1 25uA Current 0 to 16000 4 to 20mA 1uA 0 1 0 2 100us channel 400us channel 1ms channel Voltage 15V Current 30mA 2 Between communication system terminal and all analog input terminals Photocoupler isolation Between power supply system terminal and all analog input terminals Transformer isolation Between input channels Non isolation Between all power supply and communication system terminals and all analog input terminals SOOVDC for 1 minute Noise voltage 500Vp p noise width 1us noise frequency 25 to 60Hz noise simulator condition External power Terminal block for external power supply and FG supply part Tightening torque range for terminal screw M2 5 screw 0 5 to 0 6N m farsa 18 point two piece terminal block M3 screw p Tightening torque range for terminal screw M3 screw x 5 2 0 43 to 0 57N m TH35 7 5Fe TH35 7 5Al compliant with IEC 60715 For power supply Core 0 5 to 1 5mn 20 to 16 AWG Applicable wire size For I O Core 0 3 to 2 0mm 22 to 14 AWG Terminal block for external power supply and FG Applicable solderless terminal Terminal block for analog i
78. 7 is turned from No request OFF to Trigger request ON Even if CHO Difference conversion state flag RX14 to RX17 RY24 to RY27 is turned from Converting difference ON to Not converted OFF CHO Difference conversion reference value RWr6 to RWr9 RWr16 to RWr19 is not cleared For the difference conversion function refer to the following e Difference Conversion Function Page 122 Section 8 14 a Device number The device numbers of this remote register are as follows Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Remote register name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Difference conversion reference value RWr16 RWr17 RWr18 RWr19 5 Input signal error detection flag Input signal status can be checked with this flag for each channel b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 Lower limit flag Lower limit flag Lower limit flag D g oO O 4 CH3 CH2 CH1 lt E O Normal The values of b8 to b15 are fixed to 0 b1 b3 b5 b7 i Alarm On The values of bO b2 b4 and b6 are fixed to 0 a The state of Input signal error detection flag e When Input signal error detection setting address 0109H 0209H is set to Disconnection detection 4H the set channel is monitored to detect a disconnection When the analog input value satisfies the disconnection detection condition 2mA or 0 5V or less the bit of the lower limit flag in the corresponding ch
79. 7 turning from Converting difference ON to Not converted OFF a Device number The device numbers of this input signal are as follows Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Signal name CHO Difference conversion state flag RX14 RX15 RX16 RX17 RX24 RX25 RX26 RX27 192 APPENDICES 7 Alert output signal Alert output signal RX18 RX28 turns on at the detection of a process alarm a Process alarm e The signal turns on when the digital operation value in the channel where the alert output setting process alarm is active and A D conversion is enabled exceeds the range set in CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value address 010FH O20FH to CH4 Process alarm upper upper limit value address 011EH 021EH In addition the corresponding bit in Alert output flag RWrB RWr1B turns to 1 and the ALM LED of the main A D converter module turns on e When the digital operation values for all the conversion enabled channels are obtained within the setting range the corresponding values and status become as follows Item Status Latest warning code RWr1 0000H Bit position corresponding to the channel relevant to Alert output flag OFF RWrB RWr1B Alert output signal RX18 RX28 OFF ALM LED of the main A D converter module Lights out sinse gt Controlled by the A D converter module gt Controlled by the program Alert output flag RWrB RWr1B 0 Alert process alarm X 0 1 l ON
80. 9 Automatical judgment mode 0 Nor F Conversion speed setting 0 40 Que Ft Normal conversion mode iF FEF 1 Trigger conversion mode 9 Automatical judgment mode COCC External signal assignment function See ore i Tarot aims eee dadeacndtiniwn miman l 4 in Basic module parameter set CHO A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable 0 Enable Enable SY Enable RE DE 5 Click Execute button to write the parameters to the A D converter module 6 Check that 0920H is stored in Latest warning code RWr1 X Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Batch Device Device Name w 1101 T C Set Value Reference Progr Buffer Memory Module Start HEX Display format Modify Value 2 oes Sea 222 32 64 asc 10 16 Details Open El 7 Turn off and on the module power supply or perform remote reset to operate the A D converter module in synchronous communication mode Point For the extension A D converter module make the settings for each item of Ext module 1_ Module parameter 141 UONOUN4 UOIJEDIUNWWOD SNOUDIUOUAS YIOMION plal J1 YUIT DD 948 8 17 Error Notification Function When an error warning or alarm occurs the A D converter module notifies the master station of it using remote input signals and remote registers The notification of the error warning or alarm can be checked on the LED on the
81. A D conversion processing of the main A D converter module and A D conversion processing of the extension A D converter module take place as in the following 0 88 Vi Conversion processing 100us Synchronization cycle Loms of the master station S I Main A D converter module i A D conversion of CH1 N a s a AID conversion of CH2 Wh VY NN are x an l Ye N N N N Ta S N ig N x CH1 Digital operation value RWr2 CH2 Digital operation value RWr3 CH3 Digital operation value RWr4 CH4 Digital operation value RWr5 0 88ms ly 5 lz 7 Extension A D converter module i I I A D conversion of CH1 A D conversion of CH2 A D conversion of CH3 N CH1 Digital operation an 1st A D conversion value of CH1 v gt value RWr12 CH2 Digital operation value RWr13 CH3 Digital operation value RWr14 CH4 Digital operation value RWr15 Point With an extension analog module connected normal mode or trigger conversion mode involves processing time 100us in the period from the completion of conversion processing of each channel to the start of conversion processing of the next channel however synchronous communication mode does not involve this processing time UONOUN4 UOIEDIUNWWOD SNOUDIUOUAS YIOMION plal J YUIT DD 948 137 c With the extension D A converter module connected At every sy
82. A User s manual for the master local module used TI MELSEC Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User s Manual Network a Remote operation 1 Select the slave station to be reset and click Remote Operation button Select Diagnostics Destination Module Module 1 Network No 1 Change Module i Station No 1 EH Monitoring Em Total Slave Stations Total Slave Stations Current Link Number of Station z z z 7 1 C ted I ae 1 ms GrosDetected 0 Hide Disconnected Station Legend Data link unperformed Set In Parameter Start Monitor kd Selected Station Communication Status Monitor NZ2GF2B 60AD4 7 iat Check the transient communication route from the Communication Test Communication Test station to the destination station IP Communication Test Check the communication route whether you can reach communication target station from the specified station Cable Test Check the cable status between the connected station and the destination station Link Start Stop Start or stop the network data link Information Confirmation Set Network Event History Access the network the event history log Reserved Station View reserved station numbers and temporarily enable Function Enable reserved stations View station numbers set to error invalid station and Enable Disable T invalid stati Error sare a temporary error inv station Selected Station Opera
83. AIY 4 6 link special register SW e Baton pass status of the own station or master station SB0047 e Baton pass status of each station SWOOA0 to SWO00A7 For the link special relay SB and link special register SW refer to the following User s manual for the master local module used zg Interlock example Start up contact SB47 SWOAO0 0 i Pf ___ fe A Dedicated instruction to station No 1 155 9 2 Programming Procedure Create a program to execute A D conversion as illustrated by the following procedure Start creating a program Parameter settings 1 Program to be added according to the control objects Create it as necessary Error reset program Finish creating a program 9 3 Program Example 1 System configuration Power supply module Q62P CPU module Q10UDHCPU Master local module QJ71GF11 T2 Input module QX10 Main A D converter module NZ2GF2BN 60AD4 Extension A D converter module NZ2EX2B 60AD4 l Master station station No 0 Analog input Analog input CH1 to CH3 CH1 to CH4 e Remote device station station No 1 Point For the settings using the engineering tool the procedure is described based on the use of GX Works2 156 CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING a Assignment of link devices Master station station No 0 Remote device station station No 1 Main A D Extension A D CPU module Ma
84. BO to SW00B7 and configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will operate safely Do not use any use prohibited signals as a remote input or output signal Do not write any data to the use prohibited areas in the remote register If these operations are performed correct operation of the module cannot be guaranteed Design Precautions CAUTION Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Installation Precautions WARNING Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing a module Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction Installation Precautions CAUTION Use the module in an environment that meets the general specifications in this manual Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module Securely fix the module with a DIN rail After the first use of the product extension module the number of connections disconnections is limited to 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant To connect an extension module to
85. CATIONS 4 Module control data area address 1000H to 14FFH Address Default Description fost fon eroro orco fo fR ae R Station based control 4099 1003H Parameter area initialization completed area initialization Parameter area initialization completed data 4100 1004H Module operation information initialization p command 4101 1005H Module operation information initialization w o ates to 4351 0sHto OFF to 10FFH ost OFF sytemarss area Read Write 2 Station based control data Main module Module based control 4352 to 4607 1100H to 11FFH System area data Extension module 1 Th t ff f th Module based control 4608 to 4863 1200H to 12FFH Semon ale MOMON AGAPAN dala connected extension module are assigned 4 Value at the time of turning off and on the module power supply or at the time of remote reset 2 This shows whether reading writing data from to a program is possible R Readable W Writable a Module control data area of the extension module The remote buffer memory differs depending on the model of the extension module e For the extension A D converter module refer to Page 45 Section 3 7 2 3 e For the extension D A converter module refer to LA CC Link IE Field Network Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual e For the extension I O module refer to LA CC Link IE Field Network Remote I O Module User s Manual se ly Kiowa JOJING syOWSY JO s i 7 E 43
86. CH1 Digital clipping enable disable setting 0 Enable Ext module 1 Digital clipping function Ext module 1_CH2 Digital clipping enable disable setting 0 Enable Ext module 1_CH1 Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable Ext module 1_ Scaling function Ext module 1_CH1 Scaling upper limit value 32000 O Ext module 1_CH1 Scaling lower limit value For the parameters other than the above set up the initial value 158 CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING 4 Devices used by user Device Description at QX10 X20 to X2F command X2A Extension A D converter module Maximum value minimum value reset command flag completed flag a NZ2GF2BN 60AD4 RYO to RY1F Y102D NZ2EX2B 60AD4 RY20 to RY2F 3 159 Device Description FO Main A D converter module CH2 upper limit alert issued F1 Main A D converter module CH2 lower limit alert issued F2 Main A D converter module CH1 disconnection occurred F3 Main A D converter module CH3 disconnection occurred F4 Main A D converter module Maximum value minimum value read completed with an error F10 Extension A D converter module CH2 upper limit alert issued F11 Extension A D converter module CH2 lower limit alert issued F12 Extension A D converter module CH1 disconnection occurred F13 Extension A D converter module Maximum value minimum value read completed with an error MO Communication ready flag station number 1 M300 Main A D converter module Maximum value minimum value read flag M310 Main A
87. Conversion processing Sampling period of the main A D converter module Conversion speed 100us Processing time 100us x 3 600us Sampling period of the extension A D converter module Conversion speed 100us Processing time 100us x 2 400us 3 When an extension D A converter module is connected to a main A D converter module When an extension D A converter module is connected to a main A D converter module the conversion speed is fixed to 100us for the main A D converter module and the extension D A converter module The setting of the conversion speed switch address 0001H is ignored In addition between the conversion processing of each channel processing time 100us is generated Therefore the sampling period of the main A D converter module is given by the following Sampling period Conversion speed 100s Processing time 100us x Number of conversion enabled channels M Assuming that the number of conversion enabled channels is 4 for both the main A D converter module and the extension D A converter module Sampling period of the main A D converter module E ane wyons 100us 100ys 100us 100us Main A D converter module Jasana Sama e conversion enabled Conversion Conversion Conversion Conversion I channels CH1 to CH4 _1 processing processing processing processing 34 a Ke ee eee Extension D A converter CH1 module conver
88. D converter module Remote buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Input signal error detection setting 0109H 0209H Poi oint Disconnection detection 4H is valid only when the input range is 1 to 5V or 4 to 20mA Setting a channel with the other input ranges to Disconnection detection 4H causes a disconnection detection setting error error code 0820H or 1820H 16 Alert output setting Set whether to enable or disable the alert output of process alarm for each channel b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b 0 lofoftofofofofofofofo fo fonsjensjenzjcn eZ eee The values of b4 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Enabled 1 Disabled a Enabling the setting Turn on and off Initial data setting request flag RYQ to enable the setting b Default value The default value is Disable 1 for all channels c Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory addresses of this area are as follows Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Remote buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Alert output setting 010EH 020EH 217 Aowa JOLING 3Jow Y jo sjiejaq X ipu ddy 17 CHO Process alarm lower lower limit value CHO Process alarm lower upper limit value CHA Process alarm upper lower limit value CHO Process alarm upper upper limit value Set the range of digital operation value for each channel For details on Alert output function process alarm refe
89. D converter module works regardless of an on or off state of the external power supply of the extension A D converter module Use an external power supply that meets the specifications described in Performance specifications gt Page 27 Section 3 2 2 If it does not meet the specifications External power supply READY flag RX2F remains off When using the extension A D converter module use it with an interlock condition 197 Appendix 1 2 Remote output signals 1 Initial data setting request flag Turn on Initial data setting request flag RY9 after writing parameter data to the remote buffer memory Upon completion of the change of operating conditions Initial data setting completed flag RX9 turns on For the timing OFF ON OFF refer to the following e Initial data setting completed flag Page 190 Appendix 1 1 2 a Device number The device number of this output signal is as follows Signal name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Initial data setting request flag RY9 2 Error clear request flag This signal is used for clearing Error flag RXA Input signal error detection signal RX1C RX2C and Latest error code RWr0 a When a moderate error or input signal error detection occurs Eliminating the cause of the error and turning on Error clear request flag RYA from off allows the error status to be cleared resulting in Error flag RXA turning off Before Error flag RXA
90. D is set 2 When HOLD is set to Digital output HOLD CLEAR setting the Y signal of an extension digital output module is held at the time of disconnection or CPU module STOP For different types of errors the resulting error condition follows the following order of priority e Major error gt Moderate error gt Minor error gt In disconnection or the CPU module being in STOP status 149 P9 N8UUO jNpoy UOISUa xXJ Ue UM suonoun y 848 8 1 8 2 Functions with the extension A D converter module connected With the extension A D converter module connected A D conversion processing of up to eight channels is possible 1 Available function with the extension A D converter module connected Here is the list of the available function with the extension A D converter module connected Function Description Monitors the on off state of the external power supply of the extension A D converter module indicating the monitored state by the RUN LED and External power supply READY flag RX2F of the extension A D converter module For details refer to the following e External power supply READY flag Page 197 Appendix 1 1 12 External power supply monitoring function 2 Supplementary information related to the connection of the extension A D converter module Here is the list of the supplementary information related to the connection of the extension A D converter module for each drive mode Supplementary information
91. E e For the master local module LJ71GF11 T2 button TW Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE Field gt EAE Fe 2 Onthe CC IE Field Configuration window from List of stations select the main A D converter module CCIEField Configuration Edit View Close with Discarding the Setting Close with Reflecting the Setting Mode Setting Jonline StandardMode x Assignment Method Starten gt Link Scan Time Approx 0 69 ms stas Station Type PYRY Setting Rw RWr Setting _ tefresh Devici Paints Start End _ Paints start end 0 Master Station Station list 3 Open the Parameter Processing of Slave Station window KO CC IE Field Configuration gt Online gt Parameter Processing of Slave Station 4 Set Method selection to Parameter write Target Module Information N tat 2B SA Start 1 0 No 0000 Station No 1 Method selection Parameterread o i sBulyjes 19J WEJed L Z Farameter read Parameter write Parameter Information 11 5 Double click the item to be changed and enter the setting value e Items to be selected from a pull down list Double click the item to be set and from the pull down list that appears select the desired item e Items to be entered via text box Double click the item to be set and enter the desired value arameter Processing of Slave Target Module
92. H Presence or absence of an y A D converter module response time extension analog module Response time of the main A D converter module Absent Number of A D conversion enabled channels of the main A D converter module x 0 1 ms Response time of the main A D converter module 100us channel Number of A D conversion enabled channels of the main A D converter module x 0 2 ms Present i Response time of the extension A D converter module Number of A D conversion enabled channels of the extension A D converter module x 0 2 ms Response time of the main A D converter module Absent Number of A D conversion enabled channels of the main A D converter module x 0 4 ms 400us channel or Response time of the main A D converter module 4ms channel Number of A D conversion enabled channels of the main A D converter module x 0 5 ms Present Response time of the extension A D converter module Number of A D conversion enabled channels of the extension A D converter module x 0 5 ms 131 UOIJOUN UOISIOAUOD Japp SL s 132 7 Input interval and ON and OFF time of Trigger conversion request When turning on Trigger conversion request from off the ON OFF operation of Trigger conversion request should satisfy the reference values of the following items e Input interval of Trigger conversion request e ON time of Trigger conversion request e OFF time of Trigger conversion request a When Trigger conversion request
93. I Sensor external device Trigger conversion request RY19 In response to the sensor external device connected to the extension input module a corresponding signal turns on a gt Controlled by the A D converter module ON RX2E extension input module OFF OFF A D conversion Waiting for trigger input 4 AID conversion X _ Waiting for trigger input CH1 Digital operation value ap V RWr2 0 Conversion value l o ON Trigger conversion completed N flag RX19 OFF A Point Assigning a remote output signal of the main A D converter module to a remote input signal of the extension input module does not allow the pre assigned remote output signal to be turned on off or monitored by program Change or monitor the assigned remote input signal of the extension input module In the above example change or monitor RX2E 146 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS lex 2 Assigning Alert output signal RX18 of a main A D converter module to RY2A of an extension output module Main A D converter module Extension output module A Lamp Alert output external device signal Direction of data flow The lamp external device connected to the extension output module turns on ON Alert output signal RX18 OFF S4 OFF Controlled by means of the external signal assignment i function A Z 1 ON RY2A FA extension output module OFF OFF lamp external device Lights out Lights up Lights o
94. Information 72GF2B 60AD4 a Start I O No 0000 Station No 1 Method selection Parameter write gt The parameters are written to the target module a Parameter Information Checked parameters are the targets of selected processes Name i hitial Value Station parameter 9 Automatical jude __Mode swith S O Conversion speed setting 0 400us Normal conversion made Evternal sianal acsienmant function gt 0 Normal conversion mode Select an item from the pull down list i Trigger conversion signal assignment OxFFFF Trigger conversion mode OxFFFF 9 Automatical judgment mode ine Alert output signal assignment OxFFFF Covas flar 2 mi wnt Se a Enter a value in the text box The checkbox cannot be unchecked The list cannot be collapsed ete ee eae ees The refreshed device values of remote I O or remote registers may be overwritten Accesses the PLC CPU by using the current connection destination Please check if there is any problem with the connection destination Process is executed according to the parameters written in the PLC CPU For information on items not displayed on the screen please refer to the manual e Station parameter Setting item Reference Mode switch Page 86 Section 8 2 Conversion speed setting Page 89 Section 8 5 Trigger conversion signal assignment Input signal error detection signal assignment External signal assignmen
95. NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
96. OISIBAUDD G V JO SOl SI9 OeIJEYUD UOISJBAUOD O I y Xipueddy Do not set the voltage over 30mA Doing so can cause breakdown of the elements 231 Appendix 5 Accuracy of A D Conversion Accuracy of A D conversion is the accuracy for the maximum value of digital output value An input characteristic change caused by changing the offset gain setting and the input range does not sacrifice the accuracy which is maintained within the described range of the performance specifications The following graph shows the fluctuation range of accuracy with the range of 10 to 10V selected The accuracy of digital output is 0 1 16 digits at an ambient temperature of 25 5 C 0 2 32 digits at an ambient temperature of 0 to 55 C except for the conditions under noise influence Fluctuation range Digital output value Analog input value V 232 APPENDICES Appendix 6 Processing Time of CC Link IE Field Network The processing time of CC Link IE Field Network is the time taken for the A D converter module to take in analog input values and store the data into devices of the CPU module at the master station The processing time of CC Link IE Field Network depends on the following processing time e Sequence scan time of the master station e Link scan time e Processing time of the remote device station sampling period Page 90 Section 8 5 1 For details on the processing time of CC Link IE Field Network refer to the following
97. OOOODOQ DOS The values of b1 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Not aes 1 Completed a Behavior of parameter area initialization Upon the completion of setting the parameters stored in the non volatile memory back to their default values Parameter area initialization completed address 1003H turns to Completed 1 For the timing Not performed 0 gt Completed 1 Not performed 0 refer to the following e Parameter area initialization command Page 225 Appendix 3 26 b Default value The default value is Not performed 0 c Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory address of this area is as follows Remote buffer memory name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Parameter area initialization completed 1003H 226 APPENDICES 28 Module operation information initialization command This command is used to clear the module operation information stored in the non volatile memory Initialization of the module operation information is permitted provided that a non volatile memory data error module operation information error code 0110H occurs b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi foe ofolo e ojo ele fojole lool The values of b1 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Not commanded 1 Commanded a Behavior of module operation information initialization Setting Module operation information initialization command address 1004H to Commanded 1 allows the module opera
98. R Error hist ta 1 rror history data Error time Second 00H 0000H R Fixed CH1 Digital operation value R CH2 Digital operation value R R R 2562 0A02H 2563 2564 0A03H 0A04H 2565 0A05H 2566 2567 2568 2569 2570 to 2575 Station based error 2576 to 2591 niston gata 2592 to 2607 2608 to 2623 2624 to 2639 2640 to 2655 2656 to 2671 2672 to 2687 2688 to 2703 2704 to 2719 2720 to 2735 0A06H 0A07H 0A08H 0A09H OAQOAH to OAOFH CH3 Digital operation value CH4 Digital operation value System area fe 0A10H to 0A1FH Same as Error history data 1 0A20H to 0A2FH Same as Error history data 1 0A30H to OA3FH Same as Error history data 1 0A40H to OA4FH Same as Error history data 1 0A50H to OASFH Same as Error history data 1 0A60H to OAGFH Same as Error history data 1 0A70H to OA7FH Same as Error history data 1 OA80H to OA8FH Same as Error history data 1 OA90H to OA9FH Same as Error history data 1 OAAOH to OAAFH Same as Error history data 1 2736 to 2751 OABOH to OABFH Same as Error history data 1 2752 to 2767 OACOH to OACFH Same as Error history data 1 Same as Error history data 1 Same as Error history data 1 amon ooe Sytemeree Sd 4 This value is the value of factory default or the value of initialization by Error history clear command address 1000H 72 This shows whether reading writing data from to a program is possible R Readable W Writable 42 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFI
99. RX20 to RX23 ON l OFF l l 0 7984 minimum digital operation value CHO Difference conversion trigger RY14 to RY17 RY24 to RY27 CHO Difference conversion reference value RWr6 to RWr9 RWr16 to RWr19 N CHU Difference conversion state flag S RX14 to RX17 RX24 to RX27 OFF 124 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS b Operation when Initial data setting request flag RY9 is switched e During difference conversion turning on and off Initial data setting request flag RYQ results in the difference conversion continuing without updating the difference conversion reference value At this time even if the digital clipping function scaling function and shift function are set valid the difference conversion reference value is not updated To update the difference conversion reference value change CHO Difference conversion trigger RY14 to RY17 RY24 to RY27 as follows Trigger request ON No request OFF Trigger request ON ON Initial data setting request flag RYQ Initial data setting completion flag RX9 ON ON CHO Difference conversion trigger RY14 to RY17 RY24 to RY27 OFF Digital output value 9950 X10001 40100410010 10510 12000 12100 13250 4 3000X13310 Updated CHO Difference conversion reference value RWr to RWr9 RWr16 to RWr19 10000 X10000X10000X10000X 10000 X10000 10000 X10000 43000 13000 t Not updated RWr2 to RWS RWr12 to RWIS 50 X 1 X100 X 10 X510 X 2009 X12100X13250 0X 310
100. RY19 of the main A D converter module is assigned to Remote input RX using the external signal assignment function The following table lists the input interval ON time and OFF time of Remote input RX to which Trigger conversion request RY 19 is assigned Item Reference value Input interval of the trigger conversion request ON time of the trigger conversion request Response time of the extension input module ms or longer OFF time of the trigger conversion request 4 The response time of the extension input module is the minimum time period from an input of the extension input module until the notification of the input to the main A D conversion module This time is given by the following Input response time setting 0 5 ms CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS b When Trigger conversion request RY19 RY29 is not assigned to Remote input RX using the external signal assignment function The following table shows the input interval ON time and OFF time of Trigger conversion request RY 19 RY29 Item Reference value Input interval of the trigger conversion request ON time of the trigger conversion request SM LS2 T ms OFF time of the trigger conversion request 4 SM Sequence scan time ms LA User s manual for the CPU module used in the master station 2 LS Link scan time ms LA User s manual for the master local module used 3 T takes on the following values Set value of Conversion speed Presence or abse
101. SSS hee GH Scaling lower limit value i OH Scaline enable disable setting aa aC Enable 1 Digable 1 Digable 115 116 4 In Basic module parameter set the values in CHO Scaling upper limit value and CHO Scaling lower limit value A Scaling function H GH1 Scaling enable disable setting l Disable Pt Eval GH1 scaling upper limit value hy S 1200 GH Scaling lower limit value a o fao 5 Set CHO Shifting amount to conversion value RWw2 to RWw5 to 2000 Point When the shift function digital clipping function and scaling function are used together shift addition is executed on the value after digital clipping and scale conversion In this case the range of the digital operation value is determined as 32768 to 32767 For a setting example of when the digital clipping function scaling function and shift function are used together refer to the following e Example of the combined use of the digital clipping function the scaling function and the shift function Page 120 Section 8 13 4 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 13 Digital Clipping Function The range of a digital operation value is fixed between the maximum digital output value and the minimum digital output value if the input voltage or current exceeds the input range 1 How to interpret the digital clipping setting The following table shows how the output range of a digital output value changes by enabling the dig
102. Take corrective action according to the result of the unit test Page 185 Section 11 5 4 When the MODE LED turns off Check item Action When the A D converter module is in the offset gain setting change the mode to the Is the main A D converter module in offset gain setting mode g 3 normal mode after the setting is completed If the MODE LED does not turn on even after the module power supply is turned from Does any hardware error occur off to on the hardware failure is a possible cause Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 181 sqgJq eu uiyo yo v 5 When the D LINK LED turns off Check item Does the own station in network operate normally Are 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cables used Is the station to station distance 100m or less Does the cabling condition bend radius meet the specifications Is any Ethernet cable disconnected Do other stations connected to the main A D converter module operate normally Does the switching hub used in the system operate normally Does the station number of the main A D converter module overlap with the other stations 6 When the D LINK LED flashes Check item Does the set station number of the main A D converter module match the station number of the main A D converter module that is set up in the network configuration settings of the master station or in the CC IE Field configuration Is the station type remote device station
103. The main A D converter module only permits the selection 1 Setting procedure The setting procedure for the main A D converter module is as follows 1 Set Method selection to Parameter write X CC IE Field Configuration window gt Select the main A D converter module from List of stations gt CC IE Field Configuration gt Online gt Parameter Processing of Slave Station 2 In Basic module parameter set CHO A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable O 4 D conversion enabledisable setting eee OH A D conversion enable disable setting 0 Enable E OH 4 D conversion enable disable setting 0 Enable rem GHA A D conversion enable disable setting 0 Enable ETE GH4 440 conversion enabledisahle settine i Frahle I Disable 3 In Basic module parameter set up CHO Range setting A Range setting H GH Range zetting 0 4 to 20m4 tee GH Range setting 0 4 to 20mA4 H GH Range setting O4to 20mA REIT 1 ta 20m4 i E fweragine process setting OY mE Sampling peal df 10 to 10 F User range setting 1 10 to 10 fi User range setting 3 5 to PLO to 20mA Point For the extension A D converter module make the settings for each item of Ext module 1_Module parameter uoijoun Buiyoyms ebuey 7 8 99 8 8 Maximum Value Minimum Value Hold Function 100 For each channel this function stores the maximum value and
104. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the grat
105. a When Trigger conversion request RY19 of the main A D converter module is assigned to Remote input RX using the external signal assignment function Response time of the main A D converter module Response time of the extension input module ms 4 The response time of the main A D converter module is given by the following formulae Set value of Conversion speed switch address 0001H Response time of the main A D converter module Number of A D conversion enabled channels of the main A D 100us ch us channe converter module x 0 1 ms Number of A D conversion enabled channels of the main A D 400us channel or 1ms channel E converter module x 0 4 ms 2 The response time of the extension input module is the minimum time period from an input of the extension input module until the notification of the input to the main A D conversion module This time is given by the following Input response time setting 0 5 ms b When Trigger conversion request RY19 RY29 is not assigned to Remote input RX using the external signal assignment function SM LS2 Response time of the A D converter module ms 4 SM Sequence scan time ms LA User s manual for the CPU module used in the master station 2 LS Link scan time ms LA User s manual for the master local module used 73 The response time of the A D converter module is calculated as shown below Set value of Conversion speed switch address 0001
106. a main module engage the respective connectors and securely lock the module joint levers Incorrect connection may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module Securely connect the cable connectors Poor contact may cause malfunction Wiring Precautions WARNING Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction Wiring Precautions CAUTION Individually ground the FG terminal of the programmable controller with a ground resistance of 100 ohms or less Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction Tighten any unused terminal screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit due to contact with a solderless terminal Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them within the specified torque range If any spade solderless terminal is used it may be disconnected when a terminal block screw comes loose resulting in failure Check the rated voltage and terminal layout before wiring to the module and connect the cables correctly Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause a fire or failure Tighten the terminal block screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause short circuit fire or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short ci
107. abled however the external power supply 1F20H Moderate error _ e If an error occurs at the system startup or the supply OFF error of the extension output module is in an off a aie system stop correct the timing to enable the external power supply monitoring function Adjust Extension module identification code The mode name reflecting the parameter is Extension module i address 0200H to match the type and the 1F30H Moderate error different from that of the connected extension i parameter error number of points with the connected extension module module Input response time In the low 3 bits of Input response setting Set a value other than 000b and 001b to the low 3 1F40H Moderate error setting error address 0010H 000b or 001b has been set bits of Input response setting address 0010H Communication e The malfunction due to noise or other factors is D529H Major error error 1 a possible cause Check the distance of the wire and cables and the grounding condition of the individual devices and then take measures o An error has occurred in the communication against noise D52BH Major error Communication e Execute a unit test for the module If the same 176 4 2 3 error 2 error occurs again the hardware failure of the module is a possible cause Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative To clear the error modify the set value within the range and perform one of the following two ope
108. ad write data from to any Use prohibited remote registers If data is read or written correct operation of the module cannot be guaranteed 1 Remote registers of extension analog modules The remote registers differ depending on the model of extension analog module e For the extension A D converter module refer to Page 37 Section 3 6 2 e For the extension D A converter module refer to LA CC Link IE Field Network Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual 36 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 6 2 Extension A D converter module Remote register RWr Remote register RWw Module type Signal direction Master local module gt Extension A D converter module Master local module module Device No Device No Description RWr10 RWw10 Use prohibited RWr11 RWw11 Use prohibited RWr12 RWw12 CH1 Shifting amount to conversion value RWr13 RWw13 CH2 Shifting amount to conversion value RWr14 RWw14 CH3 Shifting amount to conversion value RWr15 RWw15 CH4 Shifting amount to conversion value RWr16 RWw16 Use prohibited RWr17 RWw17 Use prohibited Extension module RWr18 RWw18 Use prohibited RWr19 RWw19 Use prohibited RWr1A RWw1A Use prohibited RWr1B RWw1B Use prohibited RWr1C RWw1C Use prohibited RWr1D RWw1D Use prohibited RWr1E RWwiE Use prohibited RWr1F RWw1F Use prohibited Point Do not read or write the data from to any Use prohibited remote registers If data is read or written correct operation of the mo
109. age e Count average e Moving average a Time average This processing performs A D conversion for a set time and averages the total excluding the maximum and minimum values storing the average value into CHO Digital operation value RWr2 to RWr5 RWr12 to RWr15 The number of processing times varies depending on the sampling period Setting time Number of processing times times Sorensen Ex The number of processing times assuming the following settings with no extension module connected Item Setting Number of channels used number of channels where A D conversion is enabled 4 channels CH1 to CH4 Conversion speed 400us channel Setting time 15ms For the time average the valid lower limit value to be set is given by Minimum number of processing times or 4 x Sampling period 15 9 375 times Rounded down to the nearest whole number 4 x 0 4 Nine times of measurement is performed to output the average value 95 poya UOISIBAUOD A V 9 8 Point For the time average the valid lower limit value to be set is given by Minimum number of processing times or 4 x Sampling period Ex With a maximum of 4 channels used conversion speed 1ms channel 1ms x 4 x 4 16ms If the number of processing times falls below four due to the set time an error occurs error code 0200 where the digital operation value becomes 0 b Count average This processing performs A D conversi
110. aling lower limit value 2000 e CHO Shifting amount to conversion value RWw2 to RWw5 2000 The digital output values and digital operation values are as follows 1 Digital output value Scaling 1 Digital output value Upper limit value 16000 12000 16000 Lower limit value 0 20 ene 14000 12000 2 Value after scaling 3 Digital operation value Shift and add Adds 2000 to the value after scaling 3 Digital operation value aici 2000 0 Analog input voltage V 0 Input voltage V Digital output value Digital operation value N 1 3200 6000 o 2 6400 8000 3 9600 10000 3 4 12800 12000 Z gt 5 16000 14000 1 Set Parameter write for Method selection T CC IE Field Configuration window gt Select the main A D converter module from List of stations gt CC IE Field Configuration gt Online gt Parameter Processing of Slave Station 2 In Basic module parameter set CHO A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable V G 4 0 conversion enable disable setting ee GHI A D conversion enable disable setting H GH2 A D conversion enable disable setting a H GH3 A D conversion enable disable setting 0 Enable DOE hee GHA A D conversion enahlesdisahle settine i Frahle I Disable 3 In Basic module parameter set CHO Scaling enable disable setting to 0 Enable O Scaling function H GH1 Scaling enable disable setting H GH1 Scaling upper limit value
111. alog input points 4 points 4 channels module Voltage 10 to 10VDC input resistance 1MQ Analog input 0 to 20mADC input resistance 2500 Digital output 16 bit signed binary 16384 to 16383 Input range Digital output value Maximum resolution 10 to 10V 0 625mV User range setting 1 10 to 10V 16000 to 16000 0 5mV Voltage User range setting 2 5 to 5V 0 25mV I O characteristics maximum nay 0 to 5V 0 3125mV resolution 0 to 16000 1 to 5V 0 25mV 0 to 20mA 1 25uA 0 to 16000 Current 4 to 20mA 1uA User range setting 2 20 to 20mA 16000 to 16000 1uA Ambient temperature 0 1 Conversion 25 5 C accuracy Ambient temperature 0 2 0 to 55 C 100us channel Conversion speed 400us channel 1ms channel Absolute maximum input Voltage 15V Current 30mA Between communication system terminal and all analog input terminals Photocoupler isolation Isolation method Between power supply system terminal and all analog input terminals Transformer isolation Between input channels Non isolation Between all power supply and communication system terminals and all analog input terminals Withst It ithstand voltage 500VAC for 1 minute Noise immunity Noise voltage 500Vp p noise width 1us noise frequency 25 to 60Hz noise simulator condition SUONLOIJIOBdS SOUBUUOLIAd ZE Communication part RJ45 connector Module power Terminal block for module power supply and FG External interface i supply part Tightening to
112. amming troubleshooting I O signals and buffer memory of CC Link IE Field Network Inter module synchronization function which controls multiple modules synchronously Functions programming and troubleshooting for CC Link IE Field Network of the QD77GF16 Specifications of the QD77GF16 and information on how to establish a system maintenance and inspection and troubleshooting Also included are functions programming and buffer memory for the positioning control of the QD77GF 16 Specifications procedures before operation system configuration installation wiring various settings functions programming and troubleshooting of the CC Link IE Field Network remote I O module Specifications procedures before operation system configuration installation wiring various settings functions programming and troubleshooting of the CC Link IE Field Network digital analog converter module Description System configuration parameter settings and online operations of GX Works2 which are common to Simple projects and Structured projects System configuration parameter settings and online operations of GX Works3 CONTENTS SAB Eye RE CA Wi INS rece ceca creme site cere rea ge ere ee ge pee ne ory ee eee ep tee eee nh Tae BN RR ae neem Ma 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCTI aaa E ee eee ee a vad 5 UNG De O89 ff CN Sees ares chan aya ocean aca E T aerate kon vere nih ek E E Ree ne A Rake a Bean ieee are Ee Aveta ee 6 ETE EIN
113. and External Devices 0 00 ee 63 CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS 69 7 1 Parameter SOUINGS Seeds Seat ups oA 2 5 She een A E sl be elie Seleck Gla tee eee Se 69 7 2 Howto Change the Parameters 0 ee eee ees 76 7 2 1 Changing the network configuration 0 0 0 00 cece eee eee eens 76 7 2 2 Changing the parameters without changing the network configuration 80 3 OMmsevGal Seuind 2 52 J2ece today ietede dea teue tee ck eE a tes E ERE et 83 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 85 8 Mode Shift at Power On 144 5 ei ews a4 eet ee eee Naas 4 EE RE ee a ee h 85 9 2 Dive Mode SWIC errearen sein wha a ate aera ne eh Bada RS Nera Gare Rd a ELE a Ge are eae eS 86 8 3 Each Function in the Sequence 0 0 0c cc eee eens 88 8 4 A D Conversion Enable Disable Function 0 002000 ee 89 8 5 Conversion Speed Switch Function 0 0 0 cc eee eens 89 8 5 1 Conversion Speed and Sampling Period 0 0 cc eee 90 8 6 A D Conversion Method 4 03 ass sag keai it ears Say bate E e aa Sate balled ee oe Shs 95 8 Range Switching FUNCUON iurs 4 5 6 dage sii bee RE ad St oe ee Re ee els etek Reese 99 8 8 Maximum Value Minimum Value Hold Function 0000 cee eee 100 8 9 Input Signal Error Detection Function 0 0 00 ees 101 8 10 Alert Output Function Process Alarm 0 0 00 eens 105 SAT SCalINGUFUNCUON seelannen aeaaea a eee ae od te ets ee ae 108
114. annel turns to Alarm ON 1 With the input signal error detection function used an error detected in any of the channels where A D conversion is set to be enabled results in Input signal error detection signal RX1C RX2C being turned on b Clearing Input signal error detection flag e After the analog input value returns to a value that is larger than the criteria of disconnection detection 2mA or lower or 0 5V or lower turning on and off Error clear request flag RYA results in this flag being cleared e Turning on and off Initial data setting request flag RY9 results in this flag being cleared 202 APPENDICES c Device number The device numbers of this remote register are as follows Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Input signal error detection flag RWr1A 6 Alert output flag Whether the upper limit value or the lower limit value causes the alert can be checked for each channel Remote register name b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b2 bi bO CH4 Upper limit value CH3 Lower limit value CH3 Upper limit value CH2 Lower limit value CH2 Upper limit value CH1 Lower limit value CH1 Upper limit value D T Ig o The values of b8 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Normal 1 Alarm On a The state of Alert output flag RWrB e Ifthe value is out of the range specified in CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value address 010FH 020FH to
115. arget selected in offset gain setting mode e On The channel corresponding to the number being on is the set target e Off The channel corresponding to the number being off is not the set target CH1 to CH4 LED green Indicates whether the selected setting is offset or gain in the offset gain setting mode Set target OFFSET LED GAIN LED PORT1 connector for the connection to CC Link IE Field Network RJ45 connector P1 Connect an Ethernet cable Page 60 Section 6 5 There are no restrictions on the connection order of the cables for the P1 connector and P2 connector e On Module received abnormal data or module performing loopback L ER LED red i x was eee e Off Module received normal data or module not performing loopback e On Link up LINK LED PORT2 connector for the connection to CC Link IE Field Network RJ45 connector P2 Connect an Ethernet cable Page 60 Section 6 5 There are no restrictions on the connection order of the cables for the P1 connector and P2 connector L ER LED red CER LED re same as the LEDs of the P1 connector LINK LED green Terminal block f dul 4 R eae A terminal block for the connection of a module power supply 24VDC and FG power supply and FG 5 DIN rail hook A hook for mounting a module on a DIN rail Covers for preventing electric shock while the power is on 6 Terminal block for analo A two piece screw terminal block for the connection to an external device input
116. as been received i phe cause Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Take measures against noise and reset the a ae module If the same error occurs again the Communication An invalid data that implies an altered setting g 0970H Major error E hardware failure of the module is a possible error 4 of the communication LSI has been received cee cause Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative In synchronous communication mode Set RWwF RWrF to be assigned with the RWwF RWYrF has not been set in the RWw RWr setting and then turn off and on the RWw RWr setting power supply or perform remote reset RWw RWr setting error OEOOH 2 Moderate error Take the following actions and then turn off and on the power supply or perform remote reset e Change the synchronization period of the Synchronous communication with the master master station to a longer period Alternatively station has failed for a certain period of time reduce the number of slave stations being active in synchronous communication mode e Taking measures against noise on the transmission path Synchronous 0E10H 2 Moderate error communication error 1 175 Action Error code hexadecimal Classification Errorname Description and cause Synchronization The synchronization period set in the master Adjust the synchronization period of the master station and then turn off and on the power supply 3 Moderate error station is
117. ation initialization command Page 227 Appendix 3 28 b Default value The default value is Not performed 0 c Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory address of this area is as follows Remote buffer memory name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Modul tion inf tion initializati odule operation information initialization 1005H completed APPENDICES Appendix 4 1 0 Conversion Characteristics of A D Conversion The I O conversion characteristics of A D conversion are expressed by the slope of the straight line connecting the offset value and the gain value both of which are used when an analog signal from outside the programmable controller voltage or current input is converted to the corresponding digital value 1 Offset value An analog input value voltage or current which turns 0 as a digital output value after conversion 2 Gain value An analog input value voltage or current which turns 16000 as a digital output value after conversion UOISIBAUDD G V JO SOISI98 DeIEUD UOISJBAUOD O I y Xipueddy 229 3 Voltage input characteristics The following graph shows the voltage input characteristics Practical analog input range 16383 16000 Digital output value 384 16000 16384 15 10 5 O 1 5 10 15 Analog input voltage V Input range setting Offset value Digital output value 2 Maximum resolution 3 _ User range setting 1 4 i 1600
118. ber of sweeps acceleration 35mm Jao times each in X 4 Do not use or store the A D converter module under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure at an altitude of 0 meters Doing so may cause malfunction When using the A D converter module under pressure please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 2 If the environment satisfies the operating ambient temperature operating ambient humidity and other conditions the module can be used even outside the control panel o This indicates the assumption that the equipment is connected to which type of power distribution system from the public electrical power distribution network down to machinery within premises Category I applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities The surge voltage withstand level for the equipment with up to the rated voltage of 300V is 2500V 4 This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in terms of the environment in which the equipment is used In pollution degree 2 only non conductive pollution occurs A temporary conductivity caused by condensation must be expected occasionally Point For compliance with the EMC Directive refer to EMC and Low Voltage Directives in this manual Page 234 Appendix 7 24 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 2 1 Main A D converter module Item Description Station type Remote device station Number of an
119. burst noise is applied to the power line and signal line Immunity test in which lightning surge is applied to the power line and signal line Immunity test in which high frequency noise is applied to the power line and signal line Immunity test in which the product is installed in inductive magnetic field Immunity test in which power supply voltage is momentarily interrupted APPENDICES Standard value e 8kV air discharge e 4kV contact discharge 80 AM modulation 1kHz e 80M 1000MHz 10V m e 1 4G 2 0GHZz 3V m e 2 0G 2 7GHz 1V m e AC DC main power I O power AC I O unshielded 2kV e DC I O analog communication 1kV e AC power line AC I O power AC I O unshielded 2kV CM 1kV DM e DC power line DC I O power 0 5kV CM DM e DC I O AC I O shielded analog communication 1kV CM 0 15M 80MHz 80 AM modulation 1kHz 10Vrms SOHz 60Hz 30A m e Apply at 0 0 5 cycles and zero cross point e 0 250 300 cycles 50 60HZz e 40 10 12 cycles 50 60HZz e 70 25 30 cycles 50 60Hz 1 The module is an open type device a device designed to be housed in other equipment and must be installed inside a conductive control panel The tests were conducted with the module installed in a control panel 2 The accuracy of an analog digital converter module can indicate momentary fluctuation within 10 235 s n B6eO A MOT pue OWI Z x ipueddy SAIOSJIG OW 24 um Ajdwood 0 seunsesy Z
120. cal applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the CC Link IE Field Network analog digital converter module hereafter abbreviated as A D converter module This manual describes the operating procedure system configuration parameter settings functions and troubleshooting of the A D converter module Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of the A D converter module to handle the product correctly When applying the program examples introduced in this manual to an ac
121. cale conversion is performed on the digital values using the following formula Values after the decimal point are rounded down during scale conversion e If the input range is 10 to 10V Digital operation value 32000 2 e If the input range is user range setting 1 user range setting 2 0 to 5V 1 to 5V O to 20mA or 4 to 20mMA Dy x Sy S Digital operation value SL 16000 Item Description Dy Digital output value Sy Scaling upper limit value SL Scaling lower limit value 108 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 3 Setting procedure The setting procedure for the main A D converter module is as follows 1 Set Method selection to Parameter write T CC IE Field Configuration window gt Select the main A D converter module from List of stations gt CC IE Field Configuration gt Online gt Parameter Processing of Slave Station 2 In Basic module parameter set CHO A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable G A D conversion enable disable setting eee GHI A D conversion enable disable setting H GH2 A D conversion enable disable setting o i H GH3 4 D conversion enable disable setting 0 Enable DE hee GHA A D conversion enahlesdisahle settine i Frable I Disable 3 In Basic module parameter set CHO Scaling enable disable setting to 0 Enable A Scaling function H GH1 Scaling enable disable setting H GH1 Scaling upper limit value a hee GH Scaling lowe
122. ccessing the engineering tool x Page 152 Section 8 19 connected to the CPU module s17 uooUnY v e 1 Main and Extension indicate the following modules respectively Main Main A D converter module Extension Extension A D converter module 2 The extension A D converter module does not support user range 31 3 5 List of Remote I O Signals This section lists I O signals for a master local module The I O signal assignment shown assumes that the remote I O signals of the main module are assigned to RXO to RX1F and RYO to RY1F Remote input RX indicates the input signal from A D converter module to master local module Remote output RY indicates the output signal from master local module to A D converter module The remote I O signals of the main A D converter module and extension module are assigned as shown below Main A D converter module Extension module Module Remote input RX Remote output RY Main A D converter module RXO to RX1F RYO to RY1F Extension module RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F For details on the remote I O signals refer to the following e K gt Page 189 Appendix 1 32 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 5 1 Main A D converter module Remote input Remote output Signal direction Main A D converter module Master local Signal direction Master local module Main A D converter module module Device No Device No Descr
123. ccurred If an error occurs please consult your local a identified cannot be identified Mitsubishi representative m e Set no request 0 request 1 and no request TR 0 in Parameter information clear request address 1002H and set the parameters of the non volatile memory to default Non volatile The parameter data stored in the non volatile e Set the parameters again 0130H Moderate error memory data error memory are abnormal e Take measures against noise with a shielded parameter cable for connection e If this error persists the failure of the module is a possible cause Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e The module will be automatically recovered immediately after the error occurs Note that the error history of the errors that have occurred will Non volatile be lost The error history data stored in the non volatile 0140H Minor error memory data error e Take measures against noise with a shielded memory are abnormal error history cable for connection e If this error persists the failure of the module is a possible cause Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Incorrect network Access to A D converter module when network 0150H Minor error parameter access Reset network parameter correctly parameter was in the incorrect status error Remote buffer A buffer memory area other than the remote k Correct the setting data of the REMFR REMTO 0160H Minor error memory acc
124. changing the network configuration To change only the module parameters of the already set up slave station without changing the network configuration take the following steps 1 Open the CC IE Field Configuration window e For the master local module QJ71GF11 T2 X Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt PEE Selina e For the master local module LJ71GF11 T2 T button X Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt EthemetCC IE Field gt 2 Onthe CC IE Field Configuration window from List of stations select the A D converter module i CCIE Field Configuration Edit View Close with Discarding the Setting Close with Reflecting the Setting Mode Setting Onine Standard Mode Assignment Method Start End Link Scan Time Approx 0 69 ms See _RX RY Setting RWw RWrSetting _ tefresh Device oe Points Start End Points Start End RX Station list a 3 Open the Parameter Processing of Slave Station window T CC IE Field Configuration gt Online gt Parameter Processing of Slave Station 4 Set Method selection to Parameter read Target Module Information NZ2GF2B 50AD4 Start 1 0 No 0000 Station No 1 Method selection Parameter read Parameter read gt Parameter Information 80 CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS 9 Click amp exte button to open the foll
125. chronization period of the master station that supports the CC Link IE Field Synchronous communication mode os Network synchronous communication function The drive mode can be selected by setting Mode switch address OOOOH 1 Setting procedure 1 Set Method selection to Parameter write X CC IE Field Configuration window gt Select a main A D converter module from List of stations gt CC IE Field Configuration gt Online gt Parameter Processing of Slave Station 2 In Station parameter set Mode switch to either 0 Normal conversion mode 1 Trigger conversion mode or 9 Automatical judgment mode E External signal assignment function 0 Normal conversion mode H Trigger conversion signal assignment FFFA O OE rieger conversion mode is F EEE 9 Automatical jude ment mode The following table lists the setting value of Mode switch and the drive mode ae Tani signs arrar datartinn signal secignmant Setting value of Mode switch Drive mode 0 Normal conversion mode The A D converter module operates in normal mode 1 Trigger conversion mode The A D converter module operates in trigger conversion mode a The drive mode is automatically set according to the type of the module that operates as the master 9 Automatical judgment mode 4 station of the A D converter module 4 The drive mode varies depending on the module of the master station as shown below Drive mode whe
126. classified into two types each of which requires different troubleshooting This type of communication error results in the D LINK LED flashing or being turned off Troubleshoot the problem with the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Page 152 Section 8 19 Description and cause Action DOEOH DOE1H DOE2H DOE3H D72AH The network parameters are In the network configuration settings of the master station change Station type mismatch incorrect or out of the range the station type of the module to the remote device station e In the network configuration settings of the master station cancel Own station set to reserved The network parameters are the reserved station specification station incorrect or out of the range e Change the station number of the module to a station number that is not specified as a reserved station e Change the station number avoiding duplication of the station The settings of the station number with other stations number switch are invalid or out e After taking the above action power off and on or reset all the of the range stations where a own station s station number error has been detected Own station s station number The network parameters are Add the station information of the module to the network out of range incorrect or out of the range configuration settings of the master station Station number switch out of Own station s station number duplication error A s
127. code RWr12 to RWr15 of the corresponding channels 183 sqgJq eu Buryjoeyd v 11 4 2 Extension A D converter module 1 When the RUN LED flashes Check item Action Is the external power supply 24VDC wired Carry out the wiring of the external power supply 24VDC Is the external power supply 24VDC supplied Supply the external power supply 24VDC Does the voltage of the external power supply 24VDC conform to the pecined range Adjust the voltage value to conform to the range of performance specifications 2 When the RUN LED does not turn on Check item Action Does the main analog module operate in offset gain setting mode or If the drive mode of the main analog module is offset gain setting mode or unit test unit test mode mode change the drive mode to another one e If not connected connect the extension A D converter module to the main analog module e If properly connected refer to the following to verify the connection between the Is the extension A D converter module properly connected to the main main analog module and the extension A D converter module Page 53 analog module Section 6 3 1 If the RUN LED does not turn on even after the module power supply is turned from off to on the hardware failure is a possible cause Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Turn off and on the power supply of the main analog module and the extension A D converter module Has a hardware
128. ction and the shift function Ty For the channel with the set input range of 0 to 5V of the main A D converter module settings are made as follows e CHO Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable e CHO Scaling upper limit value 12000 e CHO Scaling lower limit value 2000 e CHO Digital clipping enable disable setting 0 Enable e CHO Shifting amount to conversion value RWw2 to RWw5 2000 1 Digital output value Digital clipping Output range 384 to 16383 Digital output value 1 Digital output value 16888 oA 2 Value after digital clipping re cu gums dais doe as a eee a ae 12000 gee Output range 0 to 16000 Scaling Upper limit value 16000 12000 Lower limit value 0 2000 3 Value after scaling Shift and add 4000 Adds 2000 to the value DOO0 wal esse eee he Bee oe eee eae e ae after scaling 0 m 384 4 1 4 Digital operation value 0 4 Digital operation value 2 Value after digital clipping Analog input voltage V Input voltage V Digital operation value 1 Set Method selection to Parameter write XO CC IE Field Configuration window gt Select the main A D converter module from List of stations gt CC IE Field Configuration gt Online gt Parameter Processing of Slave Station 2 In Basic module parameter set CHO A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable E D conversi
129. d Also the station numbers for the modules set as reserved stations can be Enable 0 checked on a list Network configuration and error 1 W condition A station not set as an error invalid station can be temporarily set as an error invalid Enable Disable Ignore Station p y Errors station and the error invalid station setting can be disabled Also the station numbers for the modules set as temporarily error ignore stations can be checked on a list The system monitor on the selected station is activated and the status of the module can System Monitor be checked 5 This function is unavailable for the A D converter module Page 153 Section 8 19 Remote Operation The selected station can be reset through the remote operation 1 a 152 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 4 Selected Station Communication Status Monitor which appears at the bottom right in the window indicates the communication status of the main A D converter module The model name of the main A D converter module is displayed as NZ2GF2B 60AD4 there For how to check the error and alarm of the main A D converter module and extension A D converter module refer to the following e How to Check Error Codes and Alarm Codes Page 168 Section 11 1 Point Some master local module or simple motion module may not support all the diagnostics For details refer to the user s manual for the master local module or the simple motion module used
130. d 8H as counted from the head of the extension input module corresponds to Remote input RX numbered 28H as counted from the head of the main A D converter module Thus set 28H for Trigger conversion signal assignment address 0002H b Enabling the setting Turn on and off Initial data setting request flag RY9 to enable the setting c Default value The default value is No assignment FFFFH d Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory address of this area is as follows Remote buffer memory name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Trigger conversion signal assignment 0002H Point Setting a value out of the range results in the error code 0170H being stored in Latest error code RWr0 Error flag RXA turning on and the ERR LED lighting up with the previously set operation With Trigger conversion signal assignment address 0002H set to Remote input RX of the extension input module turning on Trigger conversion request RY19 of the main A D converter module from off does not allow A D conversion Turn on Remote input RX which is set in Trigger conversion signal assignment address 0002H from off 206 APPENDICES 4 Input signal error detection signal assignment Assign Input signal error detection signal RX1C of the main A D converter module to Remote output RY of the extension output module by using the external signal assignment function When an error of an
131. des refer to the following e Alarm Code List Page 180 Section 11 3 How the alert output function process alarm operates After alert output if a digital operation value enters the alert output set range being less than the process alarm upper lower limit value or being greater than the process alarm lower upper limit value 0 is stored in the bit position corresponding to the channel number of Alert output flag RWrB RWr1B Once all the channels return to within the set range Alert output signal RX18 RX28 turns off and the ALM LED goes off Detection cycle When time average is specified the function is executed per set time for averaging When count average is specified the function is executed per set count for averaging In addition when sampling processing and moving average are specified the function is executed per sampling cycle Clearing the alarm code When a digital operation value enters the range Process alarm lower upper limit value lt Digital operation value lt Process alarm upper lower limit value the alarm code 0AA OH or 14A 0H stored in Latest warning code RWr1 is automatically cleared Alert output target Alert output target is CHO Digital operation value RWr2 to RWr5 RWr12 to RWr15 When using the digital clipping function scaling function shift function and difference conversion function set values considering these functions for the process alarm upper upper limit value upper
132. ducted by Mitsubishi TDK Lambda DLP 120 24 1 IDEC PSSR SF24 PS5R F24 e Use a power cable of 10m or shorter when connecting it to the module power supply terminal 5 Others a Ferrite core A ferrite core has the effect of reducing radiated noise in the 30MHz to 100MHz band It is recommended to attach ferrite cores if shielded cables coming out of the control panel do not provide sufficient shielding effects Note that the ferrite cores must be attached at the position closest to the cable hole inside the control panel If attached at an improper position the ferrite core will not produce any effect For the FG terminal on a main module that is connected to the external power supply the external power supply of an extension module and CC Link IE Field Network cables attach a ferrite core 4cm away from the module Ferrite core used for the tests conducted by Mitsubishi NEC TOKIN ESD SR 250 TDK ZCAT3035 1330 Example b Noise filter power supply line filter A noise filter is a component which has an effect on conducted noise Attaching the filter can suppress more noise The noise filter has the effect of reducing conducted noise of 10MHz or less Connect a noise filter to the external power supply of a main module and the external power supply of an extension module Use a noise filter with the damping characteristics equivalent to those of MA1206 manufactured by TDK Lambda Corporation Note that a noise filter is
133. dule cannot be guaranteed SlasiIBay a OWsayY JO SI7 9 E 3 3 7 List of Remote Buffer Memory Areas This section lists the remote buffer memory areas of the A D converter module The remote buffer memory areas of the main module and extension module are assigned as shown below VYE ei AYES AV VN An j y DE A Nas AVA Katana ANAN ENEA AA Main A D converter module Extension module Ee How the individual areas of remote buffer memory are shown in the manual Mode switch address 0000H to Setting item eooo Address of the main A D converter module A D conversion enable disable setting address 0102H 0202H Ao Setting item tooo Address of the extension A D converter module Address of the main A D converter module For details on the remote buffer memory refer to the following e K Page 205 Appendix 3 O Access permitted x Access not permitted Remote buffer memory address Access method CC IE Field REMFR configuration of instruction the engineering REMTO tool instruction Area Target Decimal Hexadecimal Module based 0 to 255 0000H to OOFFH 256 to 511 0100H to 01FFH 512 to 767 0200H to 02FFH 768 to 1279 0300H to 04FFH System area 1280 to 1535 0500H to 05FFH Station based monitor data 1536 to 1791 0600H to O6FFH Main module 1792 to 2047 0700H to 07FFH Eea Pa monitor Extension module 1 2048 to 2559 0800H
134. e DMAE GH4 Digital clipping enable disable setting 1 Disable 1 Disable Point For the extension A D converter module make the settings for each item of Ext module 1_ Module parameter 117 3 Example of the combined use of the digital clipping function and the scaling function Ec For the channel with the set input range of 0 to 5V of the main A D converter module settings are made as follows e CHO Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable e CHO Scaling upper limit value 24000 e CHO Scaling lower limit value O e CHO Digital clipping enable disable setting 0 Enable 1 Digital output value Digital output value ZL nn eee ee cece ee eet eee Pou A aan Z A E RA eae E E 2 Value after digital clipping 16000 F Waa Digital clipping Output range 384 to 16383 Output range 0 to 16000 Scaling P 2 Value after digital clipping Upper limit value 16000 24000 Lower limit value 0 0 3 Digital operation value Analog input voltage V 384 0 5 Input voltage V Digital operation value i oo p 1 Set Parameter write for Method selection XW CC IE Field Configuration window gt Select the main A D converter module from List of stations gt CC IE Field Configuration gt Online gt Parameter Processing of Slave Station 2 In Basic module parameter set CHO A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable M O 4 0 conversion
135. e CH4 Process alarm lower lower limit value CH4 Process alarm lower upper limit value CH4 Process alarm upper lower limit value CH4 Process alarm upper upper limit value Digital clipping enable disable setting Scaling enable disable setting CH1 Scaling lower limit value CH1 Scaling upper limit value CH2 Scaling lower limit value CH2 Scaling upper limit value CH3 Scaling lower limit value CH3 Scaling upper limit value CH4 Scaling lower limit value CH4 Scaling upper limit value System area 44 Default value 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H OOOFH OOOFH OOOFH Read Write 2 R W R W R W R W O O O O R W R W R W R W R W il R R W R W R W R W R W R W R R R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R R R W R W R W R W R W R W ii D CLEC Pe Rete Oly OKVC rO rQ CrO FOTA fe Fey Re he O Or Or O rO TOO Ee yy J Necessity of RY9 O O O CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS sd This value is the value of factory default or the value of initialization by Parameter area initialization command address 1002H 2 This shows whether reading writing data from to a program is possible R Readable W Writable 3 This shows the items enabled by turning on and off Initial data setting request flag RYQ 2 Monitor area address 0700H to 07FFH Type Description A Read Write 2 1792 0700H Extension module identification code
136. e surges or induction may affect the system e Ground the shielded wires or shielded cables at one point on the programmable controller side However depending on the external noise conditions it may be better to ground them externally e For the voltage input do not exceed a range of 15V Doing so can cause breakdown of the elements e For the current input do not exceed a range of 30mA Doing so can cause breakdown of the elements d External wiring The following figure shows the external wiring For voltage input Signal source 10 to 10V z A CH1 500kQ n I d gt C L ae eee i 500k SLD Shield gt 9S D i g For current input iN i l Q Signal source 0 to 20mA 3 CH4 w N Kok o se gt JE m To 5 500KQ U Te D 4 n Shield go D V rer 5 4 For the cable use the 2 core shielded twisted pair cable 2 This indicates the input resistance of the A D converter module 9 For the current input always connect the terminals V and I 4 If noise or ripple is generated in the external wiring connect a capacitor of approximately 0 1 to 0 47uF product with a voltage resistance of 25V or higher between the V and COM terminals 5 Ground the FG1 terminal without fail If there is much noise it may be better to ground the AG terminal as well If the grounding status of the AG terminal is changed after the offset gain values are set set the values
137. e Sequence K Page 88 Section 8 3 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 9 Input Signal Error Detection Function This function detects a disconnection of an analog input signal The following figure schematically shows how the input signal error detection works in the main A D converter module Detection range Out of detection range Included Analog input value Na Input value is Input value is normal normal CH1 Analog input value Condition of disconnection detection Error w detected I Time gt Controlled by the A D I converter module i i I i I I I I I I ON Input signal error detection flag CH1 lower limit flag OFF v OFF RWrA b1 a Pd ON l Input signal error detection signal OFF Ny 1 PLOFF RX1C TI ON ot WONT CH1 A D conversion completed flag a RX10 l OFF h vy Pa ON Error clear request flag OFF ie E OFF RYA Latest warning code a RWr1 0 i 4 0 ALM LED Lights out ashing Lights out ON uonoun4 uonoa 2q 10113 JeubIs ndul 6 8 Remote READY RXB 101 1 Detection condition When the following condition is satisfied a disconnection is detected Input range Disconnection detection condition 4 to 20mA Input analog value lt 2mA 1 to 5V Input analog value lt 0 5V 4 An input range other than the above results in the error code 0820H or 1820H being stored in Latest error code RWr0 Error flag RXA turning on and
138. e cag bt vce 168 Troubleshooting by symptom 186 U UNNES neres ether aa et cus a epee ote g 185 V V PED ae tae oh Mom Gs ee E ena 21 Voltage input characteristics 230 W Warming TAG x send nee henae dan Sees ora Ses 189 Warning flag assignment 210 Wiring of Ethernet cable 60 Wiring of terminal block and external devices 63 Wiring to terminal block for module power supply IG eG E E ad ae esi mes tenho eae teas 58 247 REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print date Manual number Revision January 2015 SH NA 081451ENG A First edition mA ifi t March 2015 SH NA 081451ENG B dded or modified parts Section 7 1 8 2 9 3 11 6 1 Japanese manual number SH 081450 B This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2015 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 248 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis
139. e digital output value and the digital operation value would be as follows Digital output value Scaling upper limit value 12000 46000 12000 10 16000 12000 Digital operation 4000 Digital output value l 7 2000 F Scaling lower limit value 4000 0 4000 16000 Analog input voltage V 6 O 2 10 Analog input voltage V Digital output value Digital operation value 6 16000 4000 4 12000 2000 2 8000 0 0 4000 2000 4 4000 6000 6 8000 8000 8 12000 10000 112 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 12 Shift Function This function adds shifts the set conversion value shift amount to a digital output value When the conversion value shift amount is changed it is reflected to the digital operation value in real time Therefore fine adjustment can be easily performed when the system starts 2 Digital operation value 1 CHO Digital output value TOD OL praeina naian Z after adjustment 15990 9 7 I CHO Shifting amount to te conversion value 10 Pa 1 Digital output value RWw2 to RWw5 RWw12 to RWw15 ponm before adjustment 2 CHO Digital operation value RWr2 to RWr5 RWr12 to RWr15 Analog input voltage V CHO Digital operation value RWr2 to RWr5 10 15990 16000 1 How the shift function operates The set conversion value shift amount is added to digital output value Then the digital operation value after shift and add is stored in CHO Digital operation
140. e entire machinery 1 EMC Directive related standards a Emission requirements Specification Test details Standard value CISPR16 2 3 Radio waves from the product are 30M to 230MHz QP 40dBuV m measured over 10m Radiated emission measured e 230M to 1000MHz QP 47dBuV m measured over 10m EN61131 2 2007 234 CISPR16 2 1 CISPR16 1 2 Noise from the product to the e 150k 500kHz QP 79dB Mean 66cB Conducted emission 2 power line is measured e 500k 30MHz QP 73dB Mean 60dB 4 QP Quasi Peak quasi peak value Mean mean value 2 The module is an open type device a device designed to be housed in other equipment and must be installed inside a conductive control panel The tests were conducted with the module installed in a control panel b Immunity requirements Specification EN61131 2 2007 EN61000 4 2 Electrostatic discharge immunity EN61000 4 3 Radiated radio frequency electromagnetic field immunity EN61000 4 4 Electrical fast transient burst immunity EN61000 4 5 Surge immunity EN61000 4 6 Immunity to conducted disturbances induced by radio frequency fields EN61000 4 8 Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000 4 11 Voltage dips and interruption immunity Immunity test in which electrostatic is applied to the cabinet of the equipment Immunity test in which electric fields are irradiated to the product Immunity test in which
141. e installed in six directions bee Downward installation DIN rail Horizontal installation Vertical installation Horizontal installation upside down Use a DIN rail to install the module Upward installation 52 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6 3 Installation 6 3 1 How to connect an extension module 1 Connecting procedure 71 Remove the cover on the side of the main module Save the removed cover without losing it 2 Release the module joint levers two points on the side of the extension module Slide the levers vertically UO EI E SU 9 3 Insert one module straight into the other so that the connectors of both modules engage 4 Lock the module joint levers two points on the side of the extension module Slide the levers toward the module Check that the modules are securely connected 53 04 2 Disconnecting procedure Disconnect the extension module in a procedure opposite to the connecting procedure Point Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before connecting or disconnecting extension modules Lock the module joint levers securely Failure to do so may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6 3 2 How to mount modules on a DIN rail Point The usage instructions for a DIN rail stopper is shown as one example Fix the module according to the manual of the DIN rail st
142. e size 1 25 to 2 0mm TGV2 3N NICHIFU Co Ltd Applicable wire size 1 25 to 2 0mm 32 points 16 points x Number of extension modules 16 points Points of each extension module An Ethernet cable that meets the 1000BASE T standard Category 5e or higher double shielded STP straight cable Connectable Max one module 24VDC 20 4 to 28 8VDC Inrush current 36 5A 1ms or lower Current consumption 210mA 0 30kg For details on the I O conversion characteristics refer to the following e I O Conversion Characteristics of A D Conversion K Page 229 Appendix 4 Except for the conditions under noise influence This current value is an instantaneous value at which no breakdown occurs in the internal resistance of the module The maximum input current value for constant application is 24mA Do not connect two or more cables to the terminal The sampling period varies depending on whether an extension analog module is connected or not For details refer to the following e Conversion Speed and Sampling Period Page 90 Section 8 5 1 3 2 2 Item Number of analog input points Analog input Digital output CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Extension A D Converter Module Description 4 points 4 channels module Voltage 10 to 10VDC input resistance 1MQ 0 to 20mADC input resistance 2500 16 bit signed binary 16384 to 16383 Input range Digital output value Maximum resolution 10 to 10V 16000 to 16000 0 62
143. e terminal block screws within the following specified torque range Tightening the screws too much may damage the module case Screw type Tightening torque range Terminal screw M3 0 43 to 0 57N m Terminal block mounting screw M3 5 0 68 to 0 92N m The following table shows applicable solderless terminals to be connected to the terminal block For wiring use the wire and tightening torque as specified in the table below Use UL listed solderless terminals and for processing use the tool recommended by their manufacturers Note that a solderless terminal with an insulation sleeve cannot be used Solderless terminal Wire R1 25 3 V2 MS3 0 43 to 0 57N m 22 to 14 AWG Stranded Copper 75 C or higher RAP2 3SL TGV2 3N SO8DIAEQ JeUJa X pue yoojg jeuro L JO BuUIAA 9 9 63 2 Removing and installing the terminal block a Removal procedure 1 Open the terminal block cover and loosen the terminal block mounting screws two points Terminal block mounting screw 2 Loosening the terminal block mounting screws two points allows the two piece terminal block to lift and be removed 1 Open the terminal block cover to install the two piece terminal block 2 Tighten the terminal block mounting screws Terminal block mounting screw 64 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 3 Wiring of the terminal block and external devices a Signal name The following shows signal names of the terminal block
144. ecting the Setting Mode Setting Online Normal Mode v Assignment Method Start end v Link Scan Time Approx 0 69 16 0000 000F 16 0020 002F 16 0010 0011F Tnnut Voltane 10 to 10V DC Current A Y x Refresh devices that are assigned to multiple device ranges will appear in light blue Please refer to the following supplementary information for the device range contents 4 Close the CC IE Field Configuration window KO CC IE Field Configuration gt Close with Reflecting the Setting 5 Open the refresh parameter setting window and configure the settings as shown below O ET button 6 Write the set parameter to the CPU module of the master station and reset the CPU module or turn off and on the power supply TW Online gt Write to PLC lt or Power OFF gt ON 162 CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING T Open the Parameter Processing of Slave Station window KO Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt button gt Select the main A D converter module in List of stations gt CC IE Field Configuration gt Online gt Parameter Processing of Slave Station 8 Set Method selection to Parameter write Target Module Information wz2GF28 60AD4 NZ2EX2B 60AD4 Start I O No 0000 Station No 1 Parameter write kia Parameter write 9 Set Write Value Follow the next steps to set the value e Click the title cell o
145. ed by the ALM LED Latest warning code RWr1 of the main analog module 142 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS a How to clear a warning or an alarm The method for clearing an error depends on the error type Error type Clearing an error Warning A warning is cleared five seconds after the error cause is removed After the analog input value returns to a value that is larger than the criteria of disconnection detection turn on Error clear request flag RYA or Initial data setting request a 2 Minor error detection flag RYQ from off Alarm Input signal error The error is automatically cleared when the digital operation value returns to within the set Alert output range between the process alarm upper lower limit value and the process alarm lower upper limit value 4 A warning results in the following state five seconds after the error cause is removed e Warning flag RX7 turns off e Latest warning code RWr1 is cleared e The ERR LED turns off 2 The error of the input signal error detection is not automatically cleared Latest warning code RWr1 is cleared when the other minor errors are cleared while an input signal error occurs The warning codes can be checked in the error history on GX Works2 For the error history refer to the following e Checking by executing a command of the slave station Page 168 Section 11 1 1 e Error history data K Page 222 Appendix 3 23 Operation to clear Station number sw
146. ed to the error history Even after the module power supply is turned off and on the error history remains The clock information of the error that occurred is based on the clock information acquired from the CPU module of the master station To obtain the accurate data and time of an error synchronize the clock information of the CPU module to the real time Reading the error history of this module requires the CPU module to be in the STOP status With the RUN status the read would fail To initialize the error history go to the Command Execution of Slave Station window to set Method selection to Error history clear request and then click Execute button Method selection Error history read Error history read Error dear request Command Setting Error history dear request CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 Checking by Latest error code RWr0 Carry out a check with the remote register of the master local module X Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Batch lex When the refresh target device for Latest error code RWr0 is W1100 Device Name w 1100 T C Set Value Reference Prograr C BufferMemory Modulestat J HEX Adre 3 Checking by Latest warning code RWr1 Carry out a check with the remote register of the master local module TZ Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Batch lex When the refresh target device for Latest warning code RWr1 is W1101
147. eld at the value just before the error detection and CHO A D conversion completed flag RX10 to RX13 of the corresponding channel turns off In addition once the analog input value returns to a value that is larger than the criteria of disconnection detection A D conversion resumes regardless of the reset of Input signal error detection flag RWrA and Input signal error detection signal RX1C After the first update CHO A D conversion completed flag RX10 to RX13 of the corresponding channel turns on again The ALM LED of the main module keeps flashing b For the extension A D converter module The digital operation value of the channel in which an error is detected is held at the value just before the error detection and CHO A D conversion completed flag RX20 to RX23 of the corresponding channel turns off In addition once the analog input value returns to a value that is larger than the criteria of disconnection detection A D conversion resumes regardless of the reset of Input signal error detection flag RWr1A and Input signal error detection signal RX2C After the first update CHO A D conversion completed flag RX20 to RX23 of the corresponding channel turns on again The ALM LED of the main module keeps flashing Point The digital operation value is not updated while the input signal error is being detected Once the analog input value is out of the disconnection detection condition updating the digital operation value resume
148. ension I O module connected Function Reference External power supply monitoring function Page 145 Section 8 18 1 1 External signal assignment function Page 146 Section 8 18 1 2 Digital output HOLD CLEAR setting function referred to as the output HOLD CLEAR setting function in the manual of I O modules CC Link IE Field Network Remote I O Module Cyclic data update watch function User s Manual Input response time setting function Number of ON times integration function 1 External power supply monitoring function This function monitors the on off state of the external power supply with the I O PW LED of an extension output module indicating the state By using External power supply monitor request flag RY1F a moderate error is generated when the external power supply is off Thus the ON OFF status of the external power supply is notified and the extension output module can be stopped a External power supply monitoring function While External power supply monitor request flag RY1F is on power off of the external power supply causes a moderate error to occur When using this function check that the external power supply stabilizes before turning on External power supply monitor request flag RY1F When turning off the external power supply turn off External power supply monitor request flag RY1F in advance b Setting and checking the external power supply monitoring function Item Description Reference S
149. er 236 APPENDICES 3 Cables Use shielded cables for the cables which are connected to the module and run out from the control panel If a shielded cable is not used or not grounded correctly the noise immunity will not meet the specified value a Cables for the CC Link IE Field Network The precautions for using CC Link IE Field Network cables are as follows e CC Link IE Field Network cables are made up of shielded wires Strip a part of the jacket as shown below and ground the exposed shield in the largest possible area CC Link IE Field Network cable Shield b Grounding the cable clamp Use shielded cables for external wiring and ground the shields of the external wiring cables to the control panel with the AD75CK type cable clamp Mitsubishi Ground the shield section 20 to 30cm away from the module Inside the control panel KS R Module IA A RA l 20 to 30cm Hi AD75CK Lee l For details of the AD75CK refer to the following A AD75CK type Cable Clamping Instruction Manual c Analog I O signal line Use a signal line of 30m or shorter when connecting it to the analog I O terminals of the module 237 s n d B6eO A MOT pue JW Z XIipuaddy SAIOSJIG OW 24 uM jdwo9 0 s Inse N Z xipueddy 238 4 External power supply e Use a CE marked product for an external power supply and always ground the FG terminal External power supply used for the tests con
150. er module To use an extension module carry out wiring of a power supply and external devices to the extension module Parameter settings and programming Set parameters and create a program Offset gain setting If the user range is necessary set up the offset gain setting 4 To replace the module refer to the point below Point To replace the module follow the procedure described below ha e Turn off the module power supply and remove the A D converter module e Prepare a new A D converter module and follow the illustration above as instructed from Setting a station number to Parameter settings and programming No re setting of network parameters of the master station is required e f necessary to use the user range perform the offset gain setting e Carry out operation check and then restart the control 46 Page 50 Section 6 1 Page 51 Section 6 2 Page 53 Section 6 3 Page 53 Section 6 3 Page 58 Section 6 4 Page 60 Section 6 5 Page 69 Section 7 1 Page 76 Section 7 2 Page 155 CHAPTER 9 Page 83 Section 7 3 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION Memo 47 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This chapter describes how to configure the system using A D converter modules For the configuration on CC Link IE Field Network refer to the following User s manual for the master local module used 5 1 System Configuration with A D Converter Module The following figure shows
151. er on the module Power on the external device Check if the LINK LED on the port into which the Ethernet cable is connected is on The LINK LED may take a few seconds to light up after the module power supply is turned on Normally it lights up in a few seconds If the LINK LED does not light up refer to the troubleshooting section to take the corrective action Page 181 Section 11 4 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Point PORT1 connector and PORT2 connector need not to be distinguished When only one connector is used in star topology either PORT1 connector or PORT2 connector can be used Both can be used When two connectors are used in line topology or ring topology there is no restriction on the connection combination of PORT1 connector and PORT 2 connector For example the connection from PORT1 to PORT1 and the connection from PORT1 to PORT2 are both possible Connection from port 1 to port 2 Connection from port 1 to port 1 and from port 2 to port 2 P1 O GO Ma 1 Power off the module 2 With the latch of the Ethernet cable pressed unplug the cable jqe9 Jeusauyy Jo BuIA S 9 61 62 2 Precautions a Laying Ethernet cables e The Ethernet cables must be placed in the duct or fixed by clamp If not dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact e Do not to
152. ess buffer memory areas has been accessed using error the REMFR REMTO instruction instruction to access the remote buffer memory 173 Action E d ater Classification ror name Description and cause External signal The addresses set in the external signal assignment function are different from those assigned to the extension I O module A indicates a type of the following errors Adjust the external signal assignment function to 017AH Moderate error assignment setting 0 Trigger conversion function fall within the addresses assigned to the extension error 1 Input signal error detection function I O module 2 Alert output function 3 Error output 4 Warning output Same address for The same address has been set in multiple 0180H Moderate error the external signal extension output modules for the external Set a unique address assignment function signal assignment function The averaging time value set in CHO Time average Count average Moving average address 0105H to 0108H is outside the Set the averaging time to a value in the range of 2 range of 2 to 5000ms to 5000ms O indicates the number of the channel where 4 Averaging time an error has occurred 0200H Moderate error setting out of range The time average value set in CHO Time average Count average Moving average address 0105H to 0108H is less than 4 x Adjust the time average value to be equal to or Sampling period ms greater than 4 x Sampling
153. esulting in operation just before the error By default O is set and so change the set value When the following functions are used alert targets are digital operation values that reflect the operations of each function Set values considering operation results of each function e Digital clipping function e Scaling function e Shift function e Difference conversion function 218 APPENDICES 18 Digital clipping enable disable setting Set whether to enable or disable the digital clipping function for each channel For details on the digital clipping function refer to the following e Digital Clipping Function Page 117 Section 8 13 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 o o o o o o o o o jo f o fo fenjensjenzjcn VN The values of b4 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Enabled 1 Disabled a Enabling the setting Turn on and off Initial data setting request flag RYQ to enable the setting b Default value The default value is Disabled 1 for all channels c Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory addresses of this area are as follows n a Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module emote buffer memory name Digital clipping enable disable setting 011FH 021FH 19 Scaling enable disable setting Set whether to enable or disable scaling for each channel b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 9 Lo foflofofofolfofolfo fo fo fenjensjenzjc
154. et whether to enable or disable the external Ext it t flag RY1F P 200 A dix 1 2 7 xternal power supply monitor request flag sewer supely monitoring unctio age ppendix 7 p p uuo jNpoy UOISUa xXJ Ue ym SUOH OUN g1 g Indicates whether the external power supply Page 196 Appendix 1 1 11 Ext itor status flag RX1F Ae PONOR SEREY enone naa monitoring function is enabled or disabled 145 2 External signal assignment function This function allows remote input or output signals of the main A D converter module to be assigned to remote I O signals of the extension I O module connected Signals can be input from the extension I O module and error signals can be output to the external at the fixed timing without influence from the sequence scan or link scan Target remote I O signal of external signal assignment Buffer memory to be set Trigger conversion request RY19 Trigger conversion signal assignment Input signal error detection signal RX1C Input signal error detection signal assignment Alert output signal RX18 Alert output signal assignment Error flag RXA Error flag assignment Warning flag RX7 Warning flag assignment a How the external signal assignment function operates Ex 1 Assigning Trigger conversion request RY19 of a main A D converter module to RX2E of an extension input module Main A D converter module Extension input module Direction of data flow em E N
155. etection setting 4 Disconnection detection CH2 Alert output setting 0 Enable CH2 Process alarm upper upper limit value 16000 Alert output function CH2 Process alarm upper lower limit value 10000 CH2 Process alarm lower upper limit value 3000 CH2 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 CH2 Digital clipping enable disable setting 0 Enable Digital clipping function CH3 Digital clipping enable disable setting 0 Enable CH3 Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable Scaling function CH3 Scaling upper limit value 32000 CH3 Scaling lower limit value 0 For the parameters other than the above use the initial value c Ext module 1_Module parameter Setting item Setting value Ext module 1_CH2 Averaging process setting 2 Count average Ext module 1_CH2 Time average Count average Moving 50 average Ext module 1_Average processing setting Ext module 1_CH3 Averaging process setting 3 Moving average Ext module 1_CH3 Time average Count average Moving 10 average Ext module 1_CH1 Input signal error detection function 4 Disconnection detection setting Ext module 1_ Input signal error detection function Ext module 1_CH2 Alert output setting 0 Enable Ext module 1_CH2 Process alarm upper upper limit value 16000 Ext module 1_ Alert output function Ext module 1_CH2 Process alarm upper lower limit value 10000 Ext module 1_CH2 Process alarm lower upper limit value 3000 Ext module 1_CH2 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 Ext module 1_
156. etwork Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual 11 4 1 Main A D converter module 1 When the PW LED does not turn on Check item Action If any LED other than the PW LED turns on the hardware failure is a possible cause Is any LED other than the PW LED turned on m Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Is the module power supply 24VDC wired Wire the module power supply 24VDC Is the module power supply 24VDC supplied Supply the module power supply 24VDC Does the voltage of the module power supply 24VDC conform to the apeciied range Adjust the voltage value to conform to the range of performance specifications 2 When the RUN LED does not turn on Check item Action Does the voltage of the module power supplied externally reach to the Verify that the voltage of the module power supply lies in the range of performance voltage of the performance specifications specifications Page 25 Section 3 2 After the check turn off and on the module power supply If the RUN LED does not turn on even after the module power supply is turned from off to on the failure of the module is a possible cause Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Does any hardware error occur 3 When the MODE LED flashes Check item Action If the A D converter module is in the unit test the D LINK LED turns on after the unit Is the main A D converter module in the unit test test is completed
157. f Initial Value to select all the items and copy them e Click the title cell of Write Value to select all the items and paste the copy e Select the items to be changed and set new values as described in Initial settings Page 158 Section 9 3 3 Target Module Information 72GF2B 60AD4 NZ2EX2B 60AD4 m Start I O No 0000 Station No 1 Method selection Parameter write v The parameters are written to the target module gt Parameter Information Checked parameters are the targets of selected processes Select All Cancel All Selections Name hitial Value Read Value Write Value Setting Range Unit Description a Station parameter Mode switch Automatic 0 Normalco Set the operation E Conversion speed setting 0 400us us Set the conversion Q External signal assignment fu J o o O o OxFFFF OxFFFF 0x0000 to 0xFF Set the signal to be OxFFFF OxFFFF 0x0000 to 0xFF Set the signal to be gt 7 wd Boe loms eee Tm gt IV Display only selectable parameters Clear All Read Value Clear All Write Value m Process Option jdwex4 wesbold 6 There is no option in the selected process The refreshed device values of remote I O or remote registers may be overwritten Accesses the PLC CPU by using the current connection destination Please chec
158. f CH4 3rd digital value of CH4 o r o r a 1 D A conversion of CH1 ae az s x s D A conversion of CH2 D A conversion of CH3 D A conversion of CH4 Point With the extension D A converter module connected the conversion speed is fixed to 100us The setting of the conversion speed switch address 0001H is ignored With an extension analog module connected normal mode or trigger conversion mode involves processing time 100us in the period from the completion of conversion processing of each channel to the start of conversion processing of the next channel however synchronous communication mode does not involve this processing time 138 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS d SB SW signals used with the CC Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function To check the operating status of the A D converter module synchronous or asynchronous use the following link special register SW on the master station e Synchronous asynchronous operation status information of each station of master station SW01C8 to SW01CF For details refer to the following When the master station is RJ71GF11 T2 or RJ71EN71 e A MELSEC iQ R CC Link IE Field Network User s Manual Application When the master station is the simple motion module MELSEC Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User s Manual Network When read digital operation values use the condition of the above mentioned link special reg
159. fae imo Swen A E fae femme Manmamvane fae fesnat er iniumvane i fa fom i cre Maxmamvane fio fomor r Winimumvane i fe femos cr Maxaman C A C Maxmamvaue C A eom omeen wen o E E Th te buff f th 1792 to 2047 0700H to 07FFH SromotSonfier memory argas ONE connected extension module are assigned 2048 to 2559 0800H to 09FFH System area ooo z Value at the time of turning off and on the module power supply or at the time of remote reset This shows whether reading writing data from to a program is possible R Readable W Writable D D D D D D DID a Monitor area of extension modules The remote buffer memory differs depending on the model of the extension module F or the extension A D converter module refer to K Page 45 Section 3 7 2 2 e For the extension D A converter module refer to LA CC Link IE Field Network Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual e For the extension I O module refer to LA CC Link IE Field Network Remote I O Module User s Manual 41 se ly Kiowa JOJING sJOWSY JO si 7 E 3 Error history area address 0A00H to OFFFH Address Default Description Read Write 2 Type value Hexadecimal OAOOH 0A01H 2560 2561 Error code OOOOH R Order of generation OOOOH R Error time First two digits of the year Last two digits of the OOOOH R year Error time Month Day 0000H R Error time Hour Minute 0000H
160. for trigger input AID i h conversion C conversion A D conversion of CH3 ti i in p Waiting for trigger input i oe A D conversion of CH4 I I a i conversion 14 l ei 14 I f 1 1 i I 2 1st conversion value of CH1 l I o CH1 Digital operation value RWr2 CH2 Digital operation value RWr3 CH3 Digital operation value RWr4 I I I I I CH4 Digital operation value RWr5 Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 Trigger conversion completed clear request RY1A 128 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS Point With the extension A D converter module connected processing time 100us arises in the period from the completion of conversion processing of each channel to the start of conversion processing of the next channel Therefore the conversion time per channel of the main A D converter module and the extension A D converter module is given by the following e With the conversion speed switch address 0001H set to 100us 100us 100us 200us e With the conversion speed switch address 0001H set to 400us 400us 100us 500us With the extension D A converter module connected the setting of the conversion speed switch address 0001H is ignored and the conversion speed is fixed to 100us In addition processing time 100us arises in the period from the completion of conversion processing of each channel to the start of conversion processing of the next channe
161. front of the module For details refer to the following e PART NAMES K Page 20 CHAPTER 2 1 Notification of an error The A D converter module notifies the master station of an error in the following method Item Description Reference Error flag RXA Turns on when a moderate error or major error occurs Page 191 Appendix 1 1 3 Latest error code RWr0 Point For an error occurred in the extension module as well the occurrence of an error is notified by the ERR LED Error flag RXA and Latest error code RWr0 of the main module Page 201 Appendix 2 1 An error code is stored when a moderate error or major error occurs a Method for clearing an error The method for clearing an error depends on the error type Clearing an error Error type Major error The error cannot be cleared Eliminate the cause of the error and then turn on Error clear request flag RYA or Initial data setting Moderate error request flag RYQ from off 2 Notification of a warning or alarm The A D converter module notifies that a warning or alarm occurs to the master station in the following method Item Description Reference Turns on when a minor error occurs Page 189 Appendix 1 1 1 Warning flag RX7 The error code or alarm code is stored when a minor error occurs Page 201 Appendix 2 2 Latest warning code RWr1 Point For an alarm occurred in the extension analog module the occurrence of an alarm is notifi
162. fts only by loosening the terminal block N TI 49 sab pmj 49 n mounting screw enabling it to be removed easily 11 Check on the error history The history of the last 15 errors and occurrence time is stored in the main A D converter module Checking the error information of the past helps to identify the cause at the time of a trouble 12 Easy settings by CC IE Field configuration of the engineering tool The CC IE Field configuration of the engineering tool makes it possible to set parameters on its window thereby reducing the programs In addition the setting status and the operating status of modules can be checked easily 19 CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES 2 1 Main A D Converter Module This section describes part names of the main A D converter module 1 04 x 0 O G e 2 9 FY Ff J it iy 45 7N Wyse eF CC Link IE Gieia NZ2GF2BN 60AD4 4 4 Do not remove this seal because it is used for our maintenance purposes A rotary switch for the following setting and test e Station Number Setting Page 50 Section 6 1 1 Station number setting switch Offset Gain Setting Page 83 Section 7 3 e Unit Test Page 185 Section 11 5 When operating the station number setting switch use a slotted screwdriver with 3 5mm or less width of the tip 20 CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES Indicates the power supply status of the main A D converter module PW LED green e On Power on e Off Po
163. g garameters Pecani echo 1 shows operating a QperatinNprocedure Open PLC P ter ialog box procedures E mage O Project window Parameter lt gt JPLC parameter Select the I O Assignment tab PLC Ware PLC So PLC Fite aT Fie ogon SFC Drie VO erage fost Ettemet Rat Setting Jeut in 1 Function Setting T shows mouse ti a eS ah Sti operations 1 Se ons J SSS pa y fee 5 is used for items SE sor sons in the menu bar and SSE T the project window Item Description Type Select the type of the connected module Page 74 Section 7 1 2 Model Name Select the model name of the connected module Page 74 Section 7 1 3 Points Set the number of points assigned to each slot Page 74 Section 7 1 4 Start XY Specify a start VO number for each slot Page 74 Section 7 1 5 Set the following VO Response Time The section of the current page is shown Setting Start X Y enables modification on the start I O numbers assigned to connected modules shows setti ng or lex hen 1000 is specified in Start X Y to the slot where a 16 point module is connected the assignment operating examples range of an input module is changed to X1000 to X100F or details refer to the following shows reference IELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals manuals Point Set the type of the connected module in Type Setting a different
164. g module Drive mode of main analog module modile u Normal mode Extension A D converter module Trigger conversion mode l Synchronous communication mode Main A D converter module Normal mode Extension D A converter module Trigger conversion mode Trigger output mode Synchronous communication mode Normal mode Extension A D converter module Trigger output mode Trigger conversion mode Synchronous communication mode Main D A converter module Normal mode Extension D A converter module Trigger output mode Synchronous communication mode 8 8 3 Each Function in the Sequence An analog input value and digital operation value are processed by the functions in the order shown below If multiple functions are enabled the output of the first processed function is used as the input of the next function Analog input CH1 to CH4 es Mode Normal mode switch mode Trigger conversion Synchronous communication mode ee ee ee ECTREREREREREREREREREE EE Trigger conversion CC Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function function Input signal error detection function Averaging processing Digital clipping function E Scaling function Shift function Difference conversion function Alert output function CHO Digital operation value Maximum value minimum value hold function CHO Maximum value CHO Minimum value 1 Digital operation value Digital values after sampling process
165. he CC IE Field Configuration window select NZ2GF2B 60AD4 from the Module List window To select an extension module in the CC IE Field Configuration window select the following models from the Module List window Extension module type Name Extension Digital Input Module NZ2EX 16 Dl Extension Digital Output Module NZ2EX 16 DO Extension A D Converter Module NZ2EX2B 60AD4 Extension D A Converter Module NZ2EX2B 60DA4 Setting fewer points of the remote I O signal or remote register than actual points that the main A D converter module or the extension module possesses does not cause an error In this case data of all the set points are subject to cyclic transmission in order eee eeeeaexe eeee eaedsc aeseeaeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeoeeeeceeecece aeaeeweeweweeweweewmewmewmewrmcCRCcCeclCORUmcCORC O O O a a O O 8 A spus sojowesed Z 69 70 1 Precautions a Before parameter settings e Read and write the parameter settings of this module with the CPU module in the STOP status Reading and writing are unavailable in the RUN status e Check that the start I O number of the network parameter of the master station matches that of the PLC parameter If they differ the parameter settings cannot be read or written b Parameter settings e When using the A D converter module always enable the block data assurance per station When it is disabled correct operation of the A D converter module cannot be guaranteed For details
166. he master station A D conversion processing is performed on the A D conversion enabled channels gt Controlled by the A D converter module Synchronization cycle of the master station A D conversion processing CHU Digital operation value A D conversion RWr2 to RWr5 RWr12 to RWr15 value a With no extension module connected or with an extension I O module connected The figure below shows the operation timing under the following settings e Synchronization period of the master station 0 88ms e Conversion speed setting 100us e Number of conversion enabled channels of the main A D converter module 4 channels V A Conversion processing 100us Synchronization cycle of the master station A D conversion of CH1 A D conversion of CH2 A D conversion of CH3 A D conversion of CH4 CH1 Digital operation value RWr2 CH2 Digital operation value RWr3 CH3 Digital operation value RWr4 CH4 Digital operation value RWr5 No Description 1 At the starting point of the synchronization period of the master station A D conversion starts 2 A D conversion takes place in the order of from CH1 to CH4 at an interval of 100us At the starting point of the synchronization period of the master station the values after A D conversion are transferred to the master station 136 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS b With the extension A D converter module connected At every synchronization period of the master station
167. i Alert output signal RX18 RX28 OFF b Device number The device numbers of this input signal are as follows Signal name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Alert output signal RX18 RX28 sjeuBblis indul s1loweyY xipueddy s euBls O I aJowWsyY Jo sjlejaq xIpueddy 193 8 Trigger conversion completed flag e Turning on Trigger conversion request RY19 RY29 with trigger conversion mode allows A D conversion in all the channels that enable A D conversion resulting in the digital operation values being stored in CHO Digital operation value RWr2 to RWr5 RWr12 to RWr15 Once the digital operation values are stored in CHO Digital operation value RWr2 to RWr5 RWr12 to RWr15 in all the channels that enable A D conversion Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 turns from Waiting for conversion OFF to Conversion completed ON e Changing Trigger conversion completed clear request RY1A RY2A from No request OFF to Clear request ON during Conversion completed ON of Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 results in Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 turning from Conversion completed ON to Waiting for conversion OFF Check that Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 turns to Waiting for conversion OFF and then turn off Trigger conversion completed clear request RY1A RY2A from on e Even if Trigger conversion request RY19 RY29 is turned on from
168. ick Ewe button to open the following window i The process Parameter read will be executed targeting the selected amp parameters The operation of the slave station may be change by the execution of the process Parameter read Also it may overwrite the device value of the PLC CPU refreshing the remote V O and remote registers Please confirm safety before the execution Please confirm that the connected PLC is correct Please confirm that the CC IE Field module is set correctly Please confirm that the target slave station is correct Do you want to execute pte eee slo oueseg ay eBueUyd 0 MOH ZZ 10 Click Yes button 11 The parameters are read from the A D converter module L eae ee SEER Station parameter Ei O 40us kE FEEF 0xF FFF 0xFFFF 0xFFFF La Oo B 0xFFFF Lo oo Cc if TT 12 Set Method selection to Parameter write 7 26 6004 4 NF2Ex 16 D0 Start I O No 0000 Station No 1 Method selection Parameter read Parameter write 13 Set Write Value Follow the next steps to set the value e Click the title cell of Read Value to select all the items and copy them e Click the title cell of Write Value to select all the items and paste the copy e Select the items to be changed and set new values ieme e Read Val Station parame Ei O 40us 0xF FF OxFFF Oo O I OxFFF O al OxFFF OxFFF The process Parameter write w
169. ill be executed targeting the selected parameters The operation of the slave station may be change by the execution of the process Parameter write Also it may overwrite the device value of the PLC CPU refreshing the remote VO and remote registers Please confirm safety before the execution Please confirm that the connected PLC ts correct Please confirm that the CC IE Field module ts set correctly Please confirm that the target slave station is correct Do you want to execute ie Eos 15 Click vs _ button 16 The parameters are written to the A D converter module Setting up the module parameters of the slave station is now complete 17 Close the CC IE Field Configuration window TW CC IE Field Configuration gt Close with Reflecting the Setting 18 Click button to open the refresh parameter setting window CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS 19 Set up the refresh parameters Change values as necessary Assignment Method C Points Start f Start End s sia oo o Sw ooo or Trersfert x e o00 E ransfer2 er ea ooo oF Transfers eww e ooo oor e w e o a ee Transfers o S S A 20 Write the set parameters to the CPU module of the master station and reset the CPU module lt 21 Put the CPU module of the master station into RUN Setting up the network configuration is now complete TTT SJOJOWECICY SU eBueuy 0 MOH ZZ 19 1 2 2 Changing the parameters without
170. in Input signal error detection setting address e Set the input range of the channel that detects 0109H and the input range has been set to a disconnection within the range of 4 to 20mA or value other than the following values 1 to 5V e 4 to 20mA e Set Input signal error detection setting address e 1to 5V 0109H of the corresponding channel to a value O indicates the number of the channel where other than Disconnection detection 4H an error has occurred Disconnection 0820H Moderate error detection setting error The values set in CH1 Scaling lower limit value address 0121H to CH4 Scaling upper limit Scaling setting out value address 0128H are outside the range of range of 32000 to 32000 O indicates the number of the channel where an error has occurred Set a value within the range of 32000 to 32000 in CH1 Scaling lower limit value address 0121H to CH4 Scaling upper limit value address 0128H 0900H Moderate error The scaling lower limit value has been set equal to or greater than the scaling upper limit Correct the settings of CH1 Scaling lower limit value in CH1 Scaling lower limit value value address 0121H to CH4 Scaling upper limit address 0121H to CH4 Scaling upper limit value address 0128H so that the scaling lower value address 0128H limit value is smaller than the scaling upper limit O indicates the number of the channel where value an error has occurred T ff th ly t
171. in a channel with a set value out of the range or a set value not meeting the following condition Scaling upper limit value gt Scaling lower limit value An error results in the error code 0900H and 1900H or 0910H and 1910H being stored in Latest error code RWr0 Error flag RXA turning on and the ERR LED lighting up resulting operation just before the error By default 0 is set and so change the set value With Scaling enable disable setting address 0120H 0220H set to Disabled 1 the settings of the following areas are ignored e CHO Scaling lower limit value e CHO Scaling upper limit value APPENDICES 21 CHO Maximum value CHO Minimum value The maximum and minimum values of converted digital operation value are stored as signed 16 bit binary See below for reset e Turning on and off Maximum value minimum value reset request RY1D of the main A D converter module results in CHO Maximum value and CHO Minimum value of the main A D converter module being updated to the current value e Turning on and off Maximum value minimum value reset request RY2D of the extension A D converter module results in CHO Maximum value and CHO Minimum value of the extension A D converter module being updated to the current value e Turning on and off Initial data setting request flag RY9 results in CHO Maximum value and CHO Minimum value of both the main A D converter module and the extension A D converter module being updated to the c
172. information related to the connection of the extension D A converter module for each drive mode Supplementary information related to the connection of the Drive mode Reference extension D A converter module e The conversion speed is fixed to 100us The setting of the conversion speed switch address 0001H is ignored Normal mode e Processing time 100us arises in the period from the Page 93 Section 8 5 1 3 completion of conversion processing of each channel to the start of conversion processing of the next channel e The extension D A converter module operates in trigger output mode P Page 87 Section 8 2 2 e The conversion speed is fixed to 100us The setting of the Trigger conversion mode conversion speed switch address 0001H is ignored e Processing time 100us arises in the period from the Page 127 Section 8 15 completion of conversion processing of each channel to the start of conversion processing of the next channel e The conversion speed is fixed to 100us The setting of the conversion speed switch address 0001H is ignored Synchronous communication mode Page 135 Section 8 16 p p uuo jNpoy uoisu xg ue yy m SUOH OUN 848 151 8 19 CC Link IE Field Network Diagnostic Function This function can be used by accessing the engineering tool connected to the CPU module enabling the detection of a network error 1 How to use the function The following instructions assume the use of
173. ing or averaging processing have been performed are called digital output values The values obtained by operating the digital output value using the digital clipping function scaling function shift function or difference conversion function are stored 2 Maximum and minimum values The maximum and minimum values of the digital operation values are stored 88 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 4 A D Conversion Enable Disable Function This function allows A D conversion to be enabled or disabled for each channel Disabling the A D conversion for unused channels reduces the conversion cycles 1 Setting procedure The setting procedure for the main A D converter module is as follows 1 Set Method selection to Parameter write XO CC IE Field Configuration window gt Select a main A D converter module from List of stations gt CC IE Field Configuration gt Online gt Parameter Processing of Slave Station 2 In Basic module parameter set CHO A D conversion enable disable setting to either 0 Enable or 1 Disable O A D conversion enable dizable setting eee OH 4 D conversion enable disable setting tee OH A D conversion enable disable setting eee OHS A D conversion enable disable setting GH4 4 1 conversion enable disable setting 0 Enable 0 Enable 0 Enable 0 Enable 1 Disable Point For the extension A D converter module go to Ext module 1_ Module parameter and make
174. input signal is detected assigned Remote output RY turns on a Setting range With the head of Remote output RY of the main A D converter module as a starting point 0000H set the number which is counted from the head of Remote output RY of the extension output module When Input signal error detection signal RX1C is assigned to the first Remote output RY of the extension output module Main A D converter module Extension output module OH to 1FH 20H to 2FH The first Remote output RY of the extension output module corresponds to Remote output RY numbered 20H as counted from the head of the main A D converter module Thus set 20H for Input signal error detection signal assignment address 0003H b Enabling the setting Turn on and off Initial data setting request flag RYQ to enable the setting c Default value The default value is No assignment FFFFH d Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory address of this area is as follows Remote buffer memory name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Input signal error detection signal assignment 0003H Point Setting a value out of the range results in the error code 0171H being stored in Latest error code RWr0 Error flag RXA turning on and the ERR LED lighting up with the previously set operation 207 Aowa JOLING SJOWSY jo sjiejaq xIpueddy 5 Alert output signal assignment Assign Alert ou
175. ion A D converter module and A D conversion completed flag RX20 to RX23 of the extension A D converter module remains off b Behavior when the external power supply of the extension A D converter module is turned on from off When the external power supply is turned from off to on External power supply READY flag RX2F turns on and the RUN LED of the extension A D converter module lights up A D conversion processing starts in the conversion enabled channels of the extension A D converter module c Behavior when the external power supply of the extension A D converter module is turned off from on When the external power supply is turned from on to off External power supply READY flag RX2F turns off and the RUN LED of the extension A D converter module flashes A D conversion processing stops on the extension A D converter module and A D conversion completed flag RX20 to RX23 of the extension A D converter module turns off ON Module power supply OFF ON Remote READY External power supply External power supply READY flag RX2F A D conversion processing is performed Aea pe gt A D conversion processing is not performed sjeuBblis indul s1loweY xipueddy s euBls O I 9J0W Jo sjlejeq xIpueddy d Device number The device number of this input signal is as follows Signal name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Point A D conversion processing on the main A
176. ion completed flag RX10 to RX13 RX20 to RX23 in the corresponding channel turning on again Averaging processing starts over after the A D conversion resumed sjeuBblis indul s loweY xipueddy s euBls O I aJowWsyY Jo sjlejaq xIpueddy e Device number The device numbers of this input signal are as follows Signal name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Input signal error detection signal RX1C RX2C 195 196 10 Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag This signal turns on when the maximum value stored in CHO Maximum value address 0601H 0603H 0605H 0607H 0701H 0703H 0705H 0707H and the minimum value stored in CHO Minimum value address 0602H 0604H 0606H 0608H 0702H 0704H 0706H 0708H are reset by turning on and off Maximum value minimum value reset request RY1D ana gt Controlled by the A D converter module gt Controlled by the program CHO Maximum value address 0601H 0603H 0605H 0607H 1601H 1603H 1605H 1607H CHO Minimum value Maximum value and Maximum value and address 0602H 0604H 0606H 0608H minimum value before reset minimum value after reset 1602H 1604H 1606H 1608H A i ON Maximum value minimum value reset ee l request RY1D RY2D OFF OFF ON Maximum value minimum value reset N N completed flag RX1D RX2D OFF OFF a Device number The device numbers of this input signal are as follows Signal na
177. ion completed flag RX10 to RX13 RX20 to RX23 turns on in order from the channel where A D conversion has been completed earlier after the start of trigger conversion After that if the following events occur CHO A D conversion completed flag RX10 to RX13 RX20 to RX23 turns off e Turning on Initial data setting request flag RY9 from off e Detection of an input signal error 129 130 5 About Trigger conversion clear request The following describes the trigger conversion clear request a Trigger conversion clear request The following figure shows the operation where Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 turns off from on by turning on Trigger conversion completed clear request RY1A RY2A from off aan gt Controlled by the A D converter module Controlled by the program ON ON Trigger conversion request RY19 RY29 OFF OFF A OFF Waiting for ie A D conversion trigger input Waiting for trigger input AID A D i conversion _ conversion _ eae 0 First conversion value Second conversion value RWr2 RWr12 Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 OFF Trigger conversion completed clear request RY1A RY2A OFF Even while Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 is on turning on Trigger conversion completed clear request RY1A RY2A from off allows the A D converter module to accept a trigger conversion request and then update the digital operation value ae
178. ion enable disable setting Ext module 1_CH2 A D conversion enable disable setting Ext module 1_A D conversion enable disable setting Ext module 1_CH3 A D conversion enable disable setting Ext module 1_CH4 A D conversion enable disable setting Ext module 1_CH1 Range setting Ext module 1_CH2 Range setting Ext module 1_Range setting Ext module 1_CH3 Range setting Ext module 1_CH4 Range setting Ext module 1_CH1 Averaging process setting Ext module 1_CH1 Time average Count average Moving average Ext module 1_CH2 Averaging process setting Ext module 1_CH2 Time average Count average Moving average Ext module 1_Average processing setting Ext module 1_CH3 Averaging process setting Ext module 1_CH3 Time average Count average Moving average Ext module 1_CH4 Averaging process setting Ext module 1_CH4 Time average Count average Moving average Ext module 1_CH1 Input signal error detection function setting Ext module 1_CH2 Input signal error detection function setting Ext module 1_ Input signal error detection function Ext module 1_CH3 Input signal error detection function setting Ext module 1_CH4 Input signal error detection function setting Ext module 1_CH1 Alert output setting Ext module 1_CH1 Process alarm upper upper limit value Ext module 1_CH1 Process alarm upper lower limit value Ext module 1_CH1 Process alarm lower upper limit value Ext module 1_CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value Ext module 1_CH2 A
179. ion flag Read Alert output flag Processing at the time of occurrence of CH2 upper limit alert Processing at the time of occurrence of CH2 lower limit alert Processing at the time of disconnection of CH1 Processing at the time of disconnection of CH3 Turn on Maximum value minimum value read flag Read the maximum value minimum value of CH1 to CH3 Processing when maximum value minimum value read is completed with an error Processing when maximum value minimum value read is completed successfully Turn on Maximum value minimum value reset request Turn off Maximum value minimum value reset request Extension A D converter module Read CH1 Digital operation value Read CH2 Digital operation value Read CH3 Digital operation value Read CH4 Digital operation value Read Input signal error detection flag Read Alert output flag Processing at the time of occurrence of CH2 upper limit alert Processing at the time of occurrence of CH2 lower limit alert Processing at the time of disconnection of CH1 Turn on Maximum value minimum value read flag Read the maximum value minimum value of CH1 to CH4 Processing when maximum value minimum value read is completed with an error Processing when maximum value minimum value read is completed successfully Turn on Maximum value minimum value reset request Turn off Maximum value minimum value reset request CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING e Program for the common parts
180. ion of the engineering tool the write to the non volatile memory is also completed at the same time For the parameters written using the REMTO instruction the timing of the write to the non volatile memory is at the time of turning on Initial data setting request flag RY9 from off At this time even an invalid parameter is written to the non volatile memory as well With an invalid parameter written turning off and on the power supply causes the invalid parameter to be read from the non volatile memory resulting in the error code being stored into Latest error code RWr0 Take corrective action with reference to the error code list Page 172 Section 11 2 Necessity Address Default Type Description P F Hexadecimal value of RY9 Read Write 2 0001H Conversion speed switch OOOOH R W O se ly Aiowsy JOJING sJOWSY JO SI 7 E 0002H Trigger conversion signal assignment for FFFFH RW O external signal assignment function Input signal error detection signal FFFFH R W O 0003H assignment for external signal assignment function 0004H Alert output signal assignment for external FFFFH R W O signal assignment function Station based parameter data Error flag assignment for external signal assignment function 0011H Digital output HOLD CLEAR setting 0000H R 0005H FFFFH R W O 8 to 15 _ N ol gt Se N NIO Oo oO 18 to 255 39 oomoo Systema e eo E oz oo
181. iption RXO 0 Use prohibited z Module type Use prohibited 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Use prohibited Use prohibited Use prohibited Use prohibited ii X6 Use prohibited RX7 Warning flag Use prohibited Use prohibited Use prohibited Initial data setting request flag A B C D Error clear request flag RX9 Initial data setting completion flag RXA Error flag RXB Remote READY Use prohibited RXC Use prohibited Use prohibited X Use prohibited Use prohibited 1 E Mm Jj A os X Use prohibited RX8 Use prohibited RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RXF F Use prohibited Main A D RX10 RY10 Use prohibited CONVENE MONE ITR RY11 Use prohibited RX12 RY12 Use prohibited RX13 RY13 Use prohibited RX14 RY14 CH1 Difference conversion trigger RX16 RY16 CH3 Difference conversion trigger RX17 RY17 CH4 Difference conversion trigger RX18 RY18 Use prohibited RX19 RY19 Trigger conversion request RX1A RY1A Trigger conversion completed clear request RX1B RY1B Use prohibited RX1C RY1C Use prohibited Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag RX1E Use prohibited RY1E Use prohibited RX15 CH2 Difference conversion state flag RY15 CH2 Difference conversion trigger sjeu iS O I IJOW Y JO S17 G E RX1D RY1D Maximum value minimum value reset request External power supply monitor status flag for extension output module External power supply monitor request flag RX1F
182. is warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 249 TRADEMARKS Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows NT Windows XP Windows Server Visio Excel PowerPoint Visual Basic Visual C and Access are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States Japan and other countries Intel Pentium and Celeron are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corp All other company names and product names used in this manual are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies 250 SH NA 081451ENG B SH NA 081451ENG B 1503 MEE MODEL CCIEF N AD U E MODEL CODE 13JX26 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN
183. isable setting Ext module 1_CH2 Scaling upper limit value Ext module 1_CH2 Scaling lower limit value Ext module 1_ Scaling function Page 108 Section 8 11 Ext module 1_CH3 Scaling enable disable setting Ext module 1_CH3 Scaling upper limit value Ext module 1_CH3 Scaling lower limit value Ext module 1_CH4 Scaling enable disable setting Ext module 1_CH4 Scaling upper limit value Ext module 1_CH4 Scaling lower limit value 6 Click ue button to open the following window MELSOFT Series GA Works2 A The process Parameter write will be executed targeting the selected 4 parameters The operation of the slave station may be change by the execution of the process Parameter write Also it may overwrite the device value of the PLC CPU refreshing the remote P O and remote registers Please confirm safety before the execution Please confirm that the connected PLC is correct Please confirm that the CC IE Field module is set correctly Please confirm that the target slave station is correct Do you want to execute a 7 Click s button 8 The parameters are written to the A D converter module Point When using an extension module also set the parameters of the extension module For the parameters of the extension module refer to the following A Manual of the extension module used Set all the items for the parameter If any blank exists the parameters cannot be written to the A D converter
184. ister SW the corresponding bit of the register being on as an interlock The following figure shows the program example for reading CH1 Digital operation value and CH2 Digital operation value of the main A D converter module with station number 17 X20 X100B X1009 SW1C9 0 X1010 bo LI MOV W102 D2002 Digital Remote Initial data Station CH1 A D CH1 Digital CH1 Digital operation READY setting No 17 conversion operation operation value completed synchronous completed value value read flag operating flag storage command status device tL MOV W103 D2003 CH2 A D CH2 Digital CH2 Digital conversion operation operation completed value value flag storage device uonouny uopeoiunwwon SNOUDIUOUAS YIOMION plal J YUIT DD 948 139 140 4 Setting method master station 1 Set the synchronization period of the master station to either of the following e 0 88ms e 1 77ms e 3 55ms For details on the setting method refer to the following When the master station is RJ71GF11 T2 or RJ71EN71 A MELSEC iQ R Inter Module Synchronization Function Reference Manual When the master station is the simple motion module A MELSEC Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User s Manual Positioning Control Point Set the synchronization period of the master station and Conversion speed setting and the number of conversion enabled channels of the A D converter modules so that the following conditions are satisfied
185. ital clipping function for each range Output range of a digital operation value Input range Digital clipping function disabled Digital clipping function enabled 384 to 16383 0 to 16000 4 to 20mA 0 to 20mA 1 to 5V 0 to 5V 10 to 10V User range setting 1 10 to 10V 16384 to 16383 16000 to 16000 User range setting 2 5 to 5V 20 to 20mA 2 Setting procedure The setting procedure for the main A D converter module is as follows 1 Set Method selection to Parameter write X CC IE Field Configuration window gt Select the main A D converter module from List of stations gt CC IE Field Configuration gt Online gt Parameter Processing of Slave Station 2 In Basic module parameter set CHO A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable O 4 0 conversion enable disable setting eee OH A D conversion enable disable setting 0 Enable ieee GH AD conversion enable disable setting 0 Enable o i H GHI 4 D conversion enable disable setting 0 Enable Dy 0 Enable GH4 440 conversion enahleddizahle settine l Frahle Disable 3 In Basic module parameter set CHO Digital clipping enable disable setting to 0 Enable E Digital clipping function uonoun4 uddi eyid 48 H GH1 Digital clipping enable disable setting GH2 Digital clipping enable disable setting H GH3 Digital clipping enable disable setting 1 Disabl
186. itch changing error error code 0940H a2 See gt Controlled by the A D converter module Station number setting station No 1 NEE switch normal Station No 10 error ero No 1 normal I 4 D J a D a A gt lt 2 O 7 I ria O 7 TI uolpun4 UOHEOYHON 10113 248 l 1 l 1 l 0940H Latest warning code RWr1 station number switch changing error 71 ERR LED Lights out i Flashing lt Lights out i gt 5 seconds ON Remote READY RXB For the method for clearing an alarm refer to the following e Input Signal Error Detection Function Page 101 Section 8 9 e Alert Output Function Process Alarm Page 105 Section 8 10 143 3 Method for clearing an error by executing the command of the slave station The following shows how to clear an error by executing the command of the slave station 71 Onthe CC IE Field Configuration window from List of stations select the main A D converter module i CCIE Field Configuration Edit View Close with Discarding the Setting Mode Setting Online Normal Mode v Assignment Method sta 2 Open the Command Execution of Slave Station window X CC IE Field Configuration gt Online gt Command Execution of Slave Station 3 Set Method selection to Error clear request and click Execute button Target Module Information 72GF2B 60AD4 Start I O No 0000 Station No 1 Method se
187. ith the list below E d a Classification Errorname Description and cause Action Turn off and on the module power supply If this error persists the failure of the module is a 0010H Major error Hardware failure Module hardware error i possible cause Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative The value set in Range setting address Range setting out 0103H is out of the range Set the value of Range setting address 0103H 0100H Moderate error ss i nas PR 7 A of range O indicates the number of the channel that has within the allowable range been incorrectly set e Change Module operation information initialization command address 1004H as follows Not commanded 0 Commanded 1 Not commanded 0 Then adjust the Non volatile aed module operation information of the non volatile memory data error 0110H 1 Moderate error module warki The non volatile memory data are abnormal memory to the default value 3 e Take anti noise measures including the use of information shielded cables for connection e If this error persists the failure of the module is a possible cause Please consult your local SR Mitsubishi representative ti User range data The value set in the offset gain setting is Start over the offset gain setting of all channels a 7 damaged The invalid where the user range setting is used p 0120H Moderate error ged g g 9 channel cannot be The channel where the error has o
188. itten into the non volatile memory in the main A D converter module Set up the offset gain setting so that the offset value is smaller than the gain value With Range setting address 0103H set to User range setting 1 or User range setting 2 the main A D converter module performs a check on the offset gain set values when Initial data setting request flag RYQ is turned on from off For invalid condition offset value gt gain value this check results in the error code 0400H being stored into Latest error code RWr0 Error flag RXA turning on and the ERR LED lighting up The extension A D converter module does not support user range Therefore the offset gain setting cannot be set up for the extension A D converter module CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 8 FuNcTIONsS This chapter describes the details of the functions available in the A D converter module and the setting procedures for those functions For details on remote I O signals remote registers and remote buffer memory refer to the following e Details of Remote I O Signals Page 189 Appendix 1 e Details of Remote Registers Page 201 Appendix 2 e Details of Remote Buffer Memory S Page 205 Appendix 3 8 1 Mode Shift at Power On At power on the main A D converter module enters any of the following modes e Offset gain setting mode e Unit test mode e Normal mode e Trigger conversion mode e Synchronous communication mode The conditions of shift to the
189. jaq xIpueddy 2 Initial data setting completed flag After writing parameter data to the remote buffer memory using the REMTO instruction turn on Initial data setting request flag RY9Q Upon completion of the change of operating conditions Initial data setting completed flag RX9 turns on For the buffer memory areas that require Initial data setting request flag RYQ to be turned on and off to enable the written parameter data refer to the following Page 38 Section 3 7 Se gt Controlled by the A D converter module Controlled by the program ON Module power supply OFF i ON Initial data setting completion flag RX9 OFF v p OFF Initial data setting request flag RY9 Reads settings from the non volatile memory Setting value change by user Parameter area Remote READY RXB 2 ON ON flag OFF al 4 OFF a RX10 to RX13 RX20 to RX23 CHL A D conversion completed 4 For data link to be made at the power on of the module power supply 2 When turning on and off Initial data setting request flag RY9 check that Remote READY RXB turns on before starting the control a Device number The device number of this input signal is as follows Signal name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Initial data setting completed flag RX9 190 APPENDICES 3 Error flag In the event of a moderate error or a major error Error flag RXA turns
190. k if there is any problem with the connection destination Process is executed according to the parameters written in the PLC CPU For information on items not displayed on the screen please refer to the manual 10 Click Execute button to write the parameters to the A D converter module 163 164 6 Program example 1 Create the following programs with GX Works2 e Program for the main A D converter module SB49 SWOB0 0 MC NO MO NO_ MO X20 X100B X1009 X1010 HM wi102 D2002 X1011 Hilmo wi103 02003 X1012 Hio wio 2004 SM400 MOV W110A D2022 MOV W110B D2023 D2023 2 FO D2023 3 F1 D2022 1 F2 D2022 5 a E X24 X100B SB47 SWOA 0 I SET M300 M300 I ZP REMFR jq K1 K1 HO H601 D2010 K6 M310 M300 M310 M311 m E LG M311 RST M300 X26 s Ee a A OAID Y101D X101D PS E s e Sa D A LOA D e Program for the extension A D converter module X283 X100B X1009 X102F X1020 1 Mov witi2 D2032 X1021 Mov W1113 D2033 X1022 Mov wi114 D2034 X1023 PAA ov w1115 D2035 SM400 MOV W111A D2052 MOV W111B D2053 D2053 2 n AA D2053 3 n A D2052 1 N AA X2A X100B SB47 SWO A 0 SET M320 M320 I 7P REMFR jq K2 K1 HO H701 D2040 K8 M330 M320 M330 M331 n A E M331 RST M320 X2C yy Eo a A 0D Y102D X102D As S frst 1020 Main A D converter module Read CH1 Digital operation value Read CH2 Digital operation value Read CH3 Digital operation value Read Input signal error detect
191. l Therefore the conversion time per channel of the main A D converter module and the extension D A converter module is 200s 4 From start to end of trigger conversion Set Mode switch address 0000H to Trigger conversion mode 1H Turning on and off Initial data setting request flag RY9 results in the error code 0920H being stored into Latest warning code RWr1 Turning off and on the module power supply results in the A D converter module being in the following state and in the state of waiting for trigger conversion input e Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 turns off e CHO A D conversion completed flag RX10 to RX13 RX20 to RX23 turns off The figure below shows the operation until the completion of A D conversion after turning on Trigger conversion request RY19 RY29 from off Turning on Trigger conversion request RY19 RY29 from off allows the A D converter module to start A D conversion processing Once the A D conversion has been completed Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 turns on from off 0 oO a gt Controlled by the A D converter module E ON O Trigger conversion request O RY19 RY29 OFF nS OFF lt D Mig O A D conversion Waiting for trigger input An Waiting for trigger input a g gg p conversion g 99 p 5 E S j 5 CH1 Digital operation value RWr2 RWr12 0 Conversion value ON Trigger conversion completed flag a RX19 RX29 OFF Point CHO A D convers
192. l block may cause drop short circuit or malfunction 08 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 4 Connecting and disconnecting a cable To connect a cable with the terminal screw loosened using a flathead screwdriver insert the wire and then tighten the terminal screw To disconnect the cable with the terminal screw loosened using a flathead screwdriver pull out the wire 5 Cable terminal processing Strip the cable sheath approximately 10mm from the end To use a bar solderless terminal connect it to the stripped part 6 List of bar solderless terminals The following table lists recommended bar solderless terminals Product name Applicable wire size Contact 0 5mm 0 75mm 0 9 to 1 0mni NICHIFU Co Ltd 1 25 to 1 5mm TE 0 5 10 TE 0 75 10 TE 1 0 10 TE 1 5 10 Bar solderless terminal Bar solderless terminal tool NH79 Al 0 5 10WH Al 0 75 10GY Al 1 10RD Al 1 5 10BK Bar solderless terminal tool CRIMPFOX6 0 5mm 0 75mm Bar solderless terminal 1 0mm Phoenix Contact Co Ltd pue Ajddns samogd 9sjNpoyy JO YOoG jeur 0 BUA 79 1 5mm 59 6 5 60 1 Connecting an Ethernet cable a Connecting Wiring of Ethernet Cable Aa 9 Turn off the module power supply of the main A D converter module and the power supply of the external devices With attention to the orientation of the cable push the Ethernet cable connector into the main A D converter module until it clicks Pow
193. larm code is stored when an input signal error is detected according to the setting of the input signal error detection function Action When the digital operation value falls within the setting range the corresponding bit of Alert output flag RWrB and Alert output signal RX18 turn off automatically and Latest warning code RWr71 is cleared After the analog input value falls within the range turning on and off Error clear request flag RYA results in the corresponding bit of Input signal error detection flag RWrA and Input signal error detection signal RX1C turning off Action When the digital operation value falls within the setting range the corresponding bit of Alert output flag RWr1B and Alert output signal RX28 turn off automatically and Latest warning code RWr1 is cleared After the analog input value falls within the range turning on and off Error clear request flag RYA results in the corresponding bit of Input signal error detection flag RWr1A and Input signal error detection signal RX2C turning off CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 4 Checking the LEDs This section describes how to troubleshoot the system by the LEDs Point For the troubleshooting using the LEDs of the extension I O module refer to the following LA CC Link IE Field Network Remote I O Module User s Manual For the troubleshooting using the LEDs of the extension D A module refer to the following LA CC Link IE Field N
194. lection Error dear request The error of the target module is deared m Command Setting Y There is no command setting in the selected process There is no execution result in the selected process The refreshed device values of remote I O or remote registers may be overwritten the PLC CPU by using the current connection destination Please check if there is any problem with the connection destination Process is executed according to the parameters written in the PLC CPU For information on items not displayed on the screen please refer to the manual be 4 Inthe window that appears shown left click button i The execution of the process Error clear request is completed 5 The error for the A D converter module is cleared 144 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 1 8 Functions with an Extension Module Connected The main A D converter module permits one extension module to be connected Point Before replacing the extension module turn off the module power supply Disconnecting an extension module during the power on of the module results in the error code 1FOOH being stored into Latest error code RWr0 Error flag RXA being turned on and ERR LED being lit up which stops the operation After replacing the extension module write parameters again 8 18 1 Functions with an extension I O module connected Here is the list of the available functions with an ext
195. lert output setting Ext module 1_CH2 Process alarm upper upper limit value Ext module 1_CH2 Process alarm upper lower limit value Ext module 1_CH2 Process alarm lower upper limit value Ext module 1_CH2 Process alarm lower lower limit value Ext module 1_ Alert output function Ext module 1_CH3 Alert output setting Ext module 1_CH3 Process alarm upper upper limit value Ext module 1_CH3 Process alarm upper lower limit value Ext module 1_CH3 Process alarm lower upper limit value Ext module 1_CH3 Process alarm lower lower limit value Ext module 1_CH4 Alert output setting Ext module 1_CH4 Process alarm upper upper limit value Ext module 1_CH4 Process alarm upper lower limit value Ext module 1_CH4 Process alarm lower upper limit value Ext module 1_CH4 Process alarm lower lower limit value Ext module 1_CH1 Digital clipping enable disable setting Ext module 1_CH2 Digital clipping enable disable setting Ext module 1 Digital clipping function Ext module 1_CH3 Digital clipping enable disable setting Ext module 1_CH4 Digital clipping enable disable setting 74 Reference Page 89 Section 8 4 Page 99 Section 8 7 Page 95 Section 8 6 Page 101 Section 8 9 Page 105 Section 8 10 Page 117 Section 8 13 CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS Setting item Reference Ext module 1_CH1 Scaling enable disable setting Ext module 1_CH1 Scaling upper limit value Ext module 1_CH1 Scaling lower limit value Ext module 1_CH2 Scaling enable d
196. ling lower limit value ee 4000 The digital output value and the digital operation value would be as follows Digital output value Scaling upper limit value 16000 12000 a lower limit value 0 EE T Analog input voltage V Digital operation value CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS Ex 2 For the channel with the set input range of 10 to 10V of the main A D converter module settings are made as follows e CHO Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable e CHO Scaling upper limit value 12000 e CHO Scaling lower limit value 4000 EO Sealine function eee GH1 Scaling enable disable setting l Disable a ia hee GH Scaling upper limit value m 12000 H GH Scaling lower limit value as 4000 The digital output value and the digital operation value would be as follows Digital output value Scaling upper limit value KT a jee ees 12000 16000 Analog input voltage V 4000 10 0 10 Analog input voltage V Digital operation value uonoun4 pues 11 9 111 ay 3 For the channel with the set user range of 2 to 10V of the main A D converter module settings are made as follows e CHO Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable e CHO Scaling upper limit value 12000 e CHO Scaling lower limit value 4000 i E Scaling function eee GH1 Scaling enable disable setting l Disable Pt Eval hee GH Scaling upper limit value S S 12000 eee GH Scaling lower limit value T 4000 Th
197. llows Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Signal name CHO Difference conversion trigger RY14 RY15 RY16 RY17 RY24 RY25 RY26 RY27 4 Trigger conversion request In trigger conversion mode turning on Trigger conversion request RY19 RY29 from off allows A D conversion to be performed only once in all the channels that are set to enable A D conversion using the trigger conversion function For the timing OFF gt ON gt OFF refer to the following e Trigger conversion completed flag lt Page 194 Appendix 1 1 8 For the trigger conversion function refer to the following e Trigger Conversion Function lt Page 127 Section 8 15 a Device number The device numbers of this output signal are as follows Signal name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Trigger conversion request RY19 RY29 199 sjeuBbls indjno sjoweY Z xipueddy s euBls O I 9J0W Jo sjlejeq X pu ddy 5 Trigger conversion completed clear request e Changing Trigger conversion completed clear request RY1A RY2A from No request OFF to Clear request ON during Conversion completed ON of Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 results in Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 turning from Conversion completed ON to Waiting for conversion OFF e Changing Trigger conversion completed clear request RX19 RX29 from No request OFF to Clear request ON during Waiting for conversion
198. lower turning on and off Error clear request flag RYA results in Input signal error detection signal RX1C RX2C turning off aaa gt Controlled by the A D converter module Controlled by the program Input signal error detection flag RWrA RWr1A 0 Input signal error detection 0 Input signal error detection signal RX1C RX2C Error clear request flag RYA Check that Input signal error detection signal RX1C RX2C is off before turning off Error clear request flag RYA from on Turning on and off Error clear request flag RYA before Input signal error detection signal RX1C RX2C turns off does not allow Input signal error detection signal RX1C RX2C to be cleared c When Input signal error detection signal turns on e CHO A D conversion completed flag RX10 to RX13 RX20 to RX23 in the corresponding channels turns off e For the error detected channel the digital operation value immediately before the error detection is held in the buffer memory e The ALM LED flashes d When Input signal error detection signal turns off e The ALM LED turns off e Latest warning code RWr1 is cleared Point Once the analog input value returns to a value enough to pass the disconnection detection criterion 2mA or lower or 0 5V or lower A D conversion resumes whether Input signal error detection signal RX1C RX2C is reset or not Completion of the first A D conversion after the restart results in CHO A D convers
199. me Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Maximum value minimum value reset RX1D RX2D completed flag 11 External power supply monitor state flag This signal turns on when the external power supply monitoring function is being activated by External power supply monitor request flag RY1F Seong gt Controlled by the A D converter module Changed by user Changed by user External power supply monitor request flag RY1F LY 1 External power supply monitor Disabled Enabled Disabled function I I I l L I I I L LI I I L I I ON N External power supply monitor a Z status flag RX1F OFF OFF For the external power supply monitoring function refer to the following e External power supply monitoring function Page 145 Section 8 18 1 1 a Device number The device number of this input signal is as follows Signal name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module External power supply monitor state flag RX1F APPENDICES 12 External power supply READY flag This signal indicates the state of the external power supply of the extension A D converter module a Behavior when the external power supply of the extension A D converter module is in an off state External power supply READY flag RX2F remains off and the RUN LED of the extension A D converter module flashes A D conversion processing is not performed on the extens
200. module To read the parameter from the A D converter module set Method selection to Parameter read and click Execute button The parameters are checked when they are written to the A D converter module If the following message is displayed during the writing take corrective action for the error code in lt gt For details on the error codes refer to the list of error codes K Page 172 Section 11 2 and the user s manual for the master local module used 19 sBunjes sojowesed Z 7 2 How to Change the Parameters This section describes the procedures to change the parameters The precautions to take when changing the parameters are the same as the following e Precautions Page 70 Section 7 1 1 7 2 1 Changing the network configuration To change the network configuration reusing the already created project set the parameters in the following steps RON 76 Turn off the module power supply from on Connect the modules again according to the desired network configuration Turn on the module power supply from off Open the CC IE Field Configuration window For the master local module QJ71GF11 T2 KO Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt CC IE Field Configuration Setting button For the master local module LJU71GF11 T2 Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethern et CC IE Field gt CCIE Field Configura
201. moo swm e e am fom om Process alarmtoneriowerinavake 0 rw To m onm ompr aam oner operimeve 0 ew To m onm espres aem ower ionerimvaue 0 rw o fonn ore prees aam ioner uoporimvaue 0 ew To s oar osano OR fe C E A mros omon swem e e TE A A s 0200H to 02FFH The remote buter memory areas of me ae E patam data connected extension module are assigned resto 1a7e_ eROOHwOaFFH Semaee SS 4 This value is the value of factory default or the value of initialization by Parameter area initialization command address 1002H 2 This shows whether reading writing data from to a program is possible R Readable W Writable 19 This shows the items enabled by turning on and off Initial data setting request flag RYQ 40 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS a Parameter area of extension modules The remote buffer memory areas differ depending on the model of extension module e For the extension A D converter module refer to Page 44 Section 3 7 2 1 e For the extension D A converter module refer to LA CC Link IE Field Network Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual e For the extension I O module refer to LA CC Link IE Field Network Remote I O Module User s Manual 2 Mon Type Station based monitor data Main module Module based monitor data Extension module 1 Module based monitor data 4 2 itoring area address 0500H to O9FFH Description 5 Read Write 2
202. n Mode switch is Master station Setting of the master station 2 set to 9 Automatical judgment mode Master local module CC Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function not supported Normal mode Setting the CC Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function Normal mode Master local module to be disabled CC Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function supported Setting the CC Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function Synchronous communication mode to be enabled First five digits of the serial number are 15091 or earlier First five digits of the serial number oF Normal mode Simple motion module are 15092 or later Synchronous communication mode 2 For how to set the master station refer to the MELSEC iQ R Inter Module Synchronization Function Reference Manual 3 Click e _ button to write the parameters to the A D converter module 86 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 4 Check that 0920H is stored in Latest warning code RWr1 X Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Batch Device f Device Name w 1101 T C Set Value Reference Progr C Buffer Memory Module Start z HEX dd 5 The A D converter module starts operating in the set drive mode by turning off and on the module power supply or performing remote reset Point For normal conversion mode operation of the A D converter module connected to a master station that suppor
203. n PZ The values of b4 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Enabled 1 Disabled a Enabling the setting Turn on and off Initial data setting request flag RYQ to enable the setting b Default value The default value is Disabled 1 for all channels c Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory addresses of this area are as follows Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Remote buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Scaling enable disable setting 0120H 0220H 219 Aowa JOLING 3Jow y jo sjiejaq xIpueddy 220 20 CHO Scaling lower limit value CHO Scaling upper limit value Set the range of scale conversion for each channel For details on the scaling function refer to the following e Scaling Function Page 108 Section 8 11 a Setting range Setting range 32000 to 32000 scaling upper limit value gt scaling lower limit value b Enabling the setting Turn on and off Initial data setting request flag RY9 to enable the setting c Default value The default value is O for all channels d Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory addresses of this area are as follows Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Remote buffer memory name CHU Scaling lower limit value 0121H 0123H 0125H 0127H 0221H 0223H 0225H 0227H CHU Scaling upper limit value 0122H 0124H 0126H 0128H 0222H 0224H 0226H 0228H Point An error occurs
204. n Error history 2 to Error history 15 address 0A10H to OAEFH in reverse chronological order If 16 or more errors occur errors are deleted from the oldest 222 APPENDICES b Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory addresses of this area are as follows Remote buffer memory name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Error history data0 OAOOH to OAEFH 24 Error history clear command This command is used to clear the error history stored in the non volatile memory b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi ole ofofo e ojoy ele ojole ool The values of b1 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Not commanded 1 Commanded a Behavior of error history clear Setting Error history clear command address 1000H to Commanded 1 allows the error history to be cleared aa gt Controlled by the A D converter module Controlled by the program Contents of error history Error history stored JPE G Error history not stored Error history clear command Not address 1000H commanded 0 Error history clear completed address 1001H Not performed 0 b Default value The default value is Not commanded 0 c Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory address of this area is as follows Remote buffer memory name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Error history clear command 1000H Aowa JOLING 3Jow y jo sjiejaq X ipu ddy 223
205. nce of an Value of T switch address 0001H extension analog module 100us channel 400us channel or 1ms channel a8 Shorter interval than the input interval Longer interval than the input interval Or Trigger conversion tequest of Trigger conversion request Longer interval than ON time of Trigger conversion request i If the interval from OFF to ON of Trigger i conversion request is shorter than i the input interval of Trigger conversion of Trigger conversion request l request the trigger conversion request is ignored ON ON ON Trigger conversion request RY19 RY29 OFF i OFF E OFF x7 OFF CH1 Digital operation value RWr2 RWr12 Longer interval than OFF time 1 CH2 Digital operation value RWr3 RWr13 CH3 Digital operation value S S RWr4 RWr14 0 1st conversion value of CH3 gt 2nd conversion value of CH3 CH4 Digital operation value s Sea 2nd conversion RWr5 RWr15 0 1st conversion value of CH4 value of CH4 133 UOIJOUN UOISIOAUOD J2 SL s 134 8 Setting procedure 1 Set Method selection to Parameter write XO CC IE Field Configuration window gt Select a main A D converter module from List of stations gt CC IE Field Configuration gt Online gt Parameter Processing of Slave Station 2 In Station parameter set Mode switch to 1 Trigger conversion mode Mode switch i Autamatical J T sie scien Normal conversion mode
206. nchronization period of the master station A D conversion processing of the main A D converter module and D A conversion processing of the extension D A converter module take place as in the following W Z Conversion processing 100us Synenronizatoh cycle a D of the master station N r A ly 1 Main A D converter module te w i A 1 A D conversion of CH1 PA YS ea GA T TS Bee l l A D conversion of CH2 l A D conversion of CH3 l I N a S x N o NX i oa N A D conversion of CH4 Vi TRV O AWS O Ss ks ENA S s CH1 Digital operation value RWr2 2nd A D conversion value of CH1 CH2 Digital operation value RWr3 CH3 Digital operation value RWr4 ce l i ba JN TE CH4 Digital operation 0 i 1st A D conversion value of CH4 BX 2nd A D conversion value of CH4 value RWr5 l l l l o Ca Extension D A converter module CH1 Digital value RWw12 1st digital value of CH1 2nd digital value of CH1 3rd digital value of CH1 s x le a a we OS gt s x s sa So CH2 Digital value RWw13 1st digital value of CH2 2nd digital value of CH2 3rd digital value of CH2 N N N s CH3 Digital value RWw14 1st digital value of CH3 2nd digital value of CH3 3rd digital value of CH3 CH4 Digital value RWw15 1st digital value of CH4 2nd digital value o
207. nd address 1002H to Commanded 1 sets the parameters in the non volatile memory back to default values aaa gt Controlled by the A D converter module Controlled by the program Parameters of non volatile memory Set parameters JN Default values Parameter area initialization command Not Not address 1002H commanded 0 Parameter area initialization completed address 1003H Not performed 0 b Default value The default value is Not commanded 0 c Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory address of this area is as follows Remote buffer memory name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Parameter area initialization command 1002H Point An execution of Parameter area initialization command address 1002H does not clear the following remote input signals and remote registers e Warning flag RX7 e Error flag RXA e Alert output signal RX18 RX28 e Input signal error detection signal RX1C RX2C In addition Remote READY RXB does not turn on After the execution of Parameter area initialization command address 1002H turning off and on the module power supply enables the module to operate normally Aowa JOLING BJOWSY jo sjiejaq xIpueddy 225 27 Parameter area initialization completed This memory area shows whether the parameters stored in the non volatile memory is initialized or not b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi OOOO
208. nd No Use s00rti O CH1 Digital operation value CH2 Digital operation value CH Nicits anersation vahie An uw r The refreshed device values of remote I O or remote registers may be overwritten Accesses the PLC CPU by using the current connection destination Please check if there is any problem with the connection destination Process is executed according to the parameters written in the PLC CPU For information on items not displayed on the screen please refer to the manual Item Storage contents Error and Solution Shows how to take the appropriate action for the error that has occurred Order of generation Shows the order of error occurrence Error time First two digits of the year Last two digits of the year Error time Month Day Shows the date and time of error occurrence Error time Hour Minute When the tens place of Month Hour and Second is 0 0 is omitted Error time Second No Use CH1 Digital operation value CH2 Digital operation value Stores the value in CHO Digital operation value RWr2 to RWr5 RWr12 to CH3 Digital operation value RW r15 at the time of occurrence of an error SOPOD wey pue S8POD 10113 YOOUD O0 MOH L LL CH4 Digital operation value 169 170 Point The error history registers 15 errors at a maximum If 16 or more errors occur errors are deleted from the oldest If the same error occurs continuously only the error that occurred first is stor
209. ng the setting Turn on and off Initial data setting request flag RYQ to enable the setting b Default value The default value is CLEAR 0H c Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory address of this area is as follows Remote buffer memory name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Digital output HOLD CLEAR setting 0011H Point When no extension output module is connected the setting of Digital output HOLD CLEAR setting address 0011H is ignored Setting data other than the above results in operation with the set value of the lower 1 bit 11 A D conversion enable disable setting Set whether to enable or disable A D conversion for each channel b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 AA E A E C E The values of b4 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 A D conversion enabled 1 A D conversion disabled a Enabling the setting Turn on and off Initial data setting request flag RY9 to enable the setting b Default value The default value is Enabled 0 for all channels c Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory addresses of this area are as follows Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Remote buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 A D conversion enable disable setting 0102H 0202H 213 Aowa yng sJowWsY jo sjiejaq xilpueddy 214 12 Range setting Set the input range for each channel b15
210. not required if the module is used in Zone A defined in EN61131 2 APPENDICES The precautions for attaching a noise filter are described below e Do not bundle the cables on the input side and output side of the noise filter If bundled the output side noise will be induced into the input side cables from which the noise was filtered Input side Input side power supply side power supply side Induction Filter E Output side device side Output side device side Noise is induced if an input line and an Arrange the wires with the input lines and output line are bundled the output lines separated e Ground the noise filter grounding terminal to the control panel with the shortest cable possible approx 10cm s n d B6eO A MOT pue JW Z XIipuaddy SAIOSJIG OW 24 um jdwo9 0 seunsesy Z xipueddy 239 Appendix 7 2 Requirements to compliance with the Low Voltage Directive The module operates at the rated voltage of 24VDC The Low Voltage Directive is not applied to the modules that operate at the rated voltage of less than 50VAC and 75VDC 240 APPENDICES Appendix 8 How to Check Serial Number and Function Version The serial number and function version of the A D converter module can be checked on the rating plate MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Relevant regulation standards MAC address Serial number Function version MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN
211. nput signals TE 0 5 10 NICHIFU Co Ltd Applicable wire size 0 5mni TE 0 75 10 NICHIFU Co Ltd Applicable wire size 0 75mn1 TE 1 0 10 NICHIFU Co Ltd Applicable wire size 0 9 to 1 0mm TE 1 5 10 NICHIFU Co Ltd Applicable wire size 1 25 to 1 5mm Al 0 5 10WH Phoenix Contact Co Ltd Applicable wire size 0 5mm Al 0 75 10GY Phoenix Contact Co Ltd Applicable wire size 0 75mni Al 1 10RD Phoenix Contact Co Ltd Applicable wire size 1 0mnt Al 1 5 10BK Phoenix Contact Co Ltd Applicable wire size 1 5mm RAV1 25 3 compliant with JIS C 2805 Applicable wire size 0 3 to 1 25mm V2 MS3 JST Mfg Co Ltd Applicable wire size 1 25 to 2 0mm RAP2 3SL Nippon Tanshi Co Ltd Applicable wire size 1 25 to 2 0mm TGV2 3N NICHIFU Co Ltd Applicable wire size 1 25 to 2 0mm RX RY points 16 points Cyclic transmission RWr RWw points 16 points Module power supply supplied 24VDC 20 4 to 28 8VDC from a main module 90mA External power supply Weight 24VDC 20 4 to 28 8VDC Inrush current 22 0A 1ms or lower Current consumption 45mA 0 22kg 2 SUONLOIJIOBdS SOUBWUOLIAd ZE 28 1 2 3 4 9 For details on the I O conversion characteristics refer to the following e I O Conversion Characteristics of A D Conversion L Page 229 Appendix 4 Except for the conditions under noise influence This current value is an instantaneous value at which no b
212. nverter module Extension analog module Extension D A converter module Extension I O module Extension input module Extension module Extension output module GX Works2 GX Works3 I O module Intelligent device station Link device Link special register SW Link special relay SB Local station Main A D converter module Main analog module Main D A converter module Main module Master station Master local module Network module Relay station REMFR Remote buffer memory Remote device station Remote I O station 12 Description A generic term for the main A D converter module and extension A D converter module A memory in an intelligent function module where data such as setting values and monitoring values exchanged with a CPU module are stored A high speed and large capacity open field network that is based on Ethernet 1000BASE T A function by which data are periodically exchanged among stations on the same network using link devices RX RY RWw and RWr A generic term for cyclic transmission and transient transmission An instruction that simplifies programming for using functions of intelligent function modules A process of stopping data link if a data link error occurs The abbreviation for the NZ2EX2B 60AD4 CC Link IE Field Network extension analog digital converter module A generic term for the extension A D converter module and extension D A converter module The abbreviation for the NZ2EX
213. o RWw5 32768 to 32767 113 Point If the digital operation value exceeds the range of 32768 to 32767 as a result of shift addition the digital operation value is fixed to the lower limit value 32768 or the upper limit value 32767 For the extension A D converter module go to Ext module 1_ Module parameter and set Ext module 1_CHO A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable and then set the value to be added in CHO Shifting amount to conversion value RWw12 to RWw15 3 Setting example Ex For the channel with the set input range of 10 to 10V of the main A D converter module settings are made as follows e CHO Shifting amount to conversion value RWw2 to RWw5 20000 The digital output values and digital operation values are as follows 2 Digital operation value after adjustment 1 Digital output value Shifting amount to 2 Digital operation value Analog input voltage V Input voltage V Digitaloutputvalue Digital operation value 4 Because the value exceeds the range of 32768 to 32767 it is fixed to 32767 the upper limit value 114 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 4 Example of the combined use of the scaling function and the shift function Ex For the channel with the set input range of 0 to 5V of the main A D converter module settings are made as follows e CHO Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable e CHO Scaling upper limit value 12000 e CHO Sc
214. o another one 3 When the digital operation value is out of the accuracy range Check item Is any measure against noise taken 188 Action Take anti noise measures including the use of shielded cables for connection APPENDICES APPENDICES Appendix 1 Details of Remote I O Signals This section describes the details of remote I O signals assigned to the master local module The described assignment of device numbers assumes that the remote I O signals of A D converter modules are assigned as follows Signal name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Remote input signals RX0 to RX1F RX20 to RX2F Remote output signals RYO to RY1F RY20 to RY2F Appendix 1 1 Remote input signals 1 Warning flag At the occurrence of a minor error Warning flag RX7 turns on Eliminating the cause of the minor error occurred and waiting for five seconds results in Latest warning code RWr1 turning to OOOOH and Warning flag RX7 turning off S gt Controlled by the A D converter module Minor error Minor error 5 seconds elapsed occurred removed y 5 seconds y C O A L L L L 1 I I L Warning flag RX7 OFF a a OFF Remote READY RXB a Device number The device number of this input signal is as follows Signal name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Warning flag RX7 189 sjeuBblis indul s1loweY xipueddy sjeu iS O I 9J0W 4O sjle
215. ode is stored when a minor error occurs An alarm code is stored when an alarm occurs After a minor error has occurred eliminating the cause of the error and then waiting for five seconds results in Latest warning code RWr1 being automatically cleared Errors or alarms that occurred in the past can be checked with Error history O address OAQOH to OAEFH For error history refer to the following e Error history datadi fs Page 222 Appendix 3 23 a Device number The device number of this remote register is as follows Remote register name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Latest warning code RWr1 3 CHO Digital operation value The digital operation value which is obtained by the digital clipping function scaling function shift function and difference conversion function is stored as signed 16 bit binary a Device number The device numbers of this remote register are as follows Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Remote register name CHO Digital operation value RWr12 RWr13 RWr14 RWr15 201 sJa sibay JoW Y jo sjiejaq Z X pu ddy 4 CHO Difference conversion reference value The digital operation value at the start of the difference conversion is stored as signed 16 bit binary as the difference conversion reference value Point The difference conversion reference value is updated when CHO Difference conversion trigger RY14 to RY17 RY24 to RY2
216. oe cov seu bak Be win ate ie Se le ae oa be dh oS Ae ee we Rew 11 2 1 Main A D converter module 000 ce ee eee eee ee ee eens 11 2 2 Extension A D converter module 0000 eee ee ee ee aa eens Alarm Code List rres aaa aad 6 ar elo dee Bale we Doe et bad a ae bie x a e ai ok eee 11 3 1 Main A D converter module 000 ce ee eee ee eee eens 11 3 2 Extension A D converter module aaa aaa a eee ee eee eee eee nes Checking the LEDS 503 426 eee oe ke a ee eas Seek ed Ae eek ley Mees bd aie Spare 11 4 1 Main A D converter module aaa aa ee eee ee ee eee eens 11 4 2 Extension A D converter module 0000 cece eee ee eee eee eens DSUs care dns Ste Dae tere ecard ae ete eee ache OE Re A ard Aer ee a leer ee Troubleshooting by Symptom 0 0 cc eee eens 11 6 1 Main A D converter module aa aaa a eee ee eee ee eens 11 6 2 Extension A D converter module aa aaa a eee ee eee eee eens APPENDICES Appendix 1 Details of Remote I O Signals 0 naana anaana eee Appendix 1 1 Remote input signals n n aana aaaea aa eee ese wee eee tech Gear ens Appendix 1 2 Remote output signalS 0 0 cc ee eee Appendix 2 Details of Remote Registers 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eee Appendix 3 Details of Remote Buffer Memory 0 0 0 ccc eee Appendix 4 I O Conversion Characteristics of A D Conversion 00 000 cee eee
217. on at 400us channel A value out of the range above results in the error code 0360H being stored in Latest error code RWr0 Error flag RXA turning on and the ERR LED lighting up a Enabling the setting Turn on and off Initial data setting request flag RYQ to enable the setting b Default value The default value is 400us channel OH c Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory address of this area is as follows Remote buffer memory name Main A D converter module Conversion speed switch 0001H Extension A D converter module 205 Aowa JOLING BJOWSY jo sjiejaq xIpueddy 3 Trigger conversion signal assignment Assign Trigger conversion request RY19 of the main A D converter module to Remote input RX of the extension input module by using the external signal assignment function Turning on the assigned Remote input RX from off allows A D conversion to be performed through the trigger conversion function a Setting range With the head of Remote input RX of the main A D converter module as a starting point 0000H set the number which is counted from the head of Remote input RX of the extension input module When Trigger conversion request RY19 is assigned to Remote input RX numbered 8H as counted from the head OH of the extension input module Main A D converter module Extension input module OH to 8H to FH OH to 1FH 20H to 28H to 2FH Remote input RX numbere
218. on enable disable setting H GHI A D conversion enable disable setting H GH2 AD conversion enable disable setting o i H GH3 4 D conversion enable disable setting 0 Enable DOE m GH4 440 conversion enahleddizahle settine 1 Digable 120 6 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS In Basic module parameter set CHO Scaling enable disable setting to 0 Enable O Scaling function eee OH Scaling enable disable setting tee OH Scaling upper limit value I OOOO O O O H OH1 Scaling lower limit value n 0 Enable ie GH2 Scaling enable disable setting 1 Digable I Disable 1 Digable CS a In Basic module parameter set the values in CHO Scaling upper limit value and CHO Scaling lower limit value EO Sealine function eee GH1 Scaling enable disable setting l Disable Pt Eval GHI Scaling upper limit value 12000 a rem GH Scaling lower limit value a o faon In Basic module parameter set CHO Digital clipping enable disable setting to 0 Enable O Digital clipping function eee H1 Digital clipping enable disable setting tee GH Digital clipping enable disable setting eee HS Digital clipping enable disable setting fee GH4 Digital clipping enable disable setting i Disable E Disable Hete Set CHO Shifting amount to conversion value RWw2 to RWw5 to 2000 Point When the digital clipping function is used with the scaling function
219. on for a set number of times and averages the total excluding the maximum and minimum values storing the average value into CHO Digital operation value RWr2 to RWr5 RWr12 to RWr15 The time taken to store the average value obtained by count average into CHO Digital operation value RWr2 to RWr5 RWr12 to RWr15 varies depending on the sampling period Number of processing times Set number of times x Sampling period Processing times assuming the following settings with no extension module connected Item Setting Number of channels used number of channels where A D conversion is enabled 4 channels CH1 to CH4 Conversion speed 400us channel Set number of times 20 times 20 x 4 x 0 4 32 0 ms An average value is output every 32 0 ms Point Because the count average requires a sum of at least two counts except the maximum and minimum values the set number of times should be set to four or more 96 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS c Moving average This processing averages the digital output values taken in at each sampling cycle for a specified number of times storing the average value into CHO Digital operation value RWr2 to RWr5 RWr12 to RWr15 Because the averaging processing is performed on a moving set of sampling processing the latest digital operation values can be obtained The moving average processing for a set number of times of four is shown below Digital output value Sampling period 16000 3 4 8
220. on of the module on the master station correct Check the version of the engineering tool and if it is prior to the supported versions update Is the version of the engineering tool supported the engineering tool For the supported version refer to the following e Supported software package K Page 49 Section 5 2 4 Perform Verify with PLC and check that network parameter settings match the settings of the CPU module If they differ match the settings by performing Read from PLC and Write to PLC and write the parameters to modules on slave stations Are network parameter settings same as the settings of the CPU module 187 wojdwAs Aq Bulooussjgnos 9 1 11 6 2 Extension A D converter module 1 When digital operation value cannot be read Check item Is there any problem with the wiring such as looseness or disconnection of analog signal lines Is the CPU module in the STOP status Is the input range setting correct Is A D conversion disabled for the channels where the analog value is to be input Is Initial data setting request flag RY9 executed Are the V and I terminals connected when the current is input Are the setting values of the averaging process setting correct Is there any potential difference between the AG terminal and the external device GND Is External power supply READY flag RX2F on Does the main analog module operate in offset gain setting mode or unit te
221. on the block data assurance per station refer to the following LA User s manual for the master local module used CC IE Field Supplementary Setting Link Scan Mode Setting 1 l Do not uncheck the box Asynchronous f Constant Scan ms 1 to 200 C Synchronous Loopback Function Setting Use Please build network configuration ring configuration that the end stations of Line Connection are connected to each other End Cancel e Do not set the parameters using the CCPASET instruction in the master station Executing the CCPASET instruction results in the module operating with block data assurance per station deactivated where proper performance as the A D converter module cannot be guaranteed The CCPASET instruction is intended to configure parameters for a master local module For details on the CCPASET instruction refer to the following LA User s manual for the master local module used e When using an extension module be sure to write the module parameters Page 71 Section 7 1 2 If the parameters of the extension module has not been written the error code 1F30H is stored in Latest error code RWr0 Error flag RXA turns on and the ERR LED lights up CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS 2 Setting procedure 1 Open the CC IE Field Configuration window e For the master local module QJ71GF11 T2 T Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt P m
222. operation value cannot be read out from the extension A D converter module check the status of external power supply READY flag RX2F If external power supply READY flag RX2F is off adjust external power supply READY flag RX2F to turn on with reference to the following Page 197 Appendix 1 1 12 If the drive mode of the main analog module is offset gain setting mode or unit test mode change the drive mode to another one Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative If the digital operation value cannot be read even after the above actions are taken the failure of the extension A D converter module is a possible cause Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 2 When an A D conversion completed flag does not turn on in the normal mode Check item Does any input signal error occur Is external power supply READY flag RX2F on Does the main analog module operate in offset gain setting mode or unit test mode Action Check Input signal error detection flag RWrA If A D conversion completed flag is not turned on for the extension A D converter module check the status of external power supply READY flag RX2F If external power supply READY flag RX2F is off adjust external power supply READY flag RX2F to turn on with reference to the following Page 197 Appendix 1 1 12 If the drive mode of the main analog module is offset gain setting mode or unit test mode change the drive mode t
223. opper used 1 Mounting procedure 1 Pull down all DIN rail hooks on the back of the modules The levers should be pulled down until it clicks 2 Hang the upper tabs of the modules on a DIN rail and push the modules in position 3 Lock the DIN rail hooks to the DIN rail to secure the modules in position Push each hook up until it clicks If the hooks are beyond the reach use a tool such as a screwdriver UO EI E SU 9 4 Loosen the screw on the DIN rail stopper 5 Hitch the bottom hook of the DIN rail stopper to the bottom of the DIN rail Hitch the hook according to the orientation of the arrow on the front of the stopper Engage the hook on the bottom side of the DIN rail 99 Engage the hook on the top side of the DIN rail 7 DIN rail stopper DIN rail stopper Hitch the upper hook of the DIN rail stopper to the top of the DIN rail Slide the DIN rail stopper up to the left side of the modules Hold the DIN rail stopper in the direction opposite to the arrow on the stopper and tighten the screw with a screwdriver Install the DIN rail stopper on the right side of the module in the same procedure For the installation on the right side be aware that the orientation of the DIN rail stopper is upside down Point Do not slide modules from the edge of the DIN rail when mounting them Doing so may damage the metal part located on the back of the module
224. ore gt Controlled by the A D converter module ON ON Trigger conversion request RY19 RY29 OFF So OFF A OFF A D conversion is performed even while A Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 is on Waiting for trigger input A D conversion Waiting for trigger input A D A D 1 conversion _ conversion _ CH1 Digital operation value X y RWr2 RWr12 0 First conversion value Second conversion value 1 o 4 ON Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 OFF b Method for Trigger conversion completed clear request The time until Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 turns off from on by means of Trigger conversion completed clear request RY1A RY2A is influenced by the sequence scan time and the link scan time To use Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 as an interlock turn on Trigger conversion request RY19 RY29 from off after Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 turns off from on Turning on Trigger conversion completed clear request RY1A RY2A from off does not clear CHO A D conversion completed flag RX10 to RX13 RX20 to RX23 To clear CHO A D conversion completed flag RX10 to RX13 RX20 to RX23 turn on Initial data setting request flag RY9 from off CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 6 Response time The following describes the response time until Trigger conversion completed flag RX19 RX29 turns on from off after trigger conversion is requested
225. ored in Latest error code RWr0 Error flag RXA turning on and the ERR LED lighting up with the I O operation stopping Synchronous communication mode ignores the set value resulting in operation with Not monitor 0 211 Aowa yng sJoWsY jo sjiejaq xIpueddy 9 Input response time setting Set the input response time of the extension input module Input response time Setting value 1 0ms 2H 1 5ms 3H Sms 4H 10ms 5H 20ms 6H 70ms 7H a Enabling the setting Turn on and off Initial data setting request flag RY9 to enable the setting b Default value The default value is 10ms 5H c Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory address of this area is as follows Remote buffer memory name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Input response time setting 0010H Point Setting data other than the above results in the error code 1F40H being stored in Latest error code RWr0 Error flag RXA turning on and the ERR LED lighting up When no extension input module is connected the setting of Input response time setting address 0010H is ignored 212 APPENDICES 10 Digital output HOLD CLEAR setting Set the output HOLD CLEAR of the extension output module For the output HOLD CLEAR setting function refer to the following LA CC Link IE Field Network Remote I O Module User s Manual Output HOLD CLEAR setting Setting value CLEAR OH HOLD 1H a Enabli
226. ot touch any terminal while power is on Doing so will cause electric shock or malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before cleaning the module or retightening the terminal block screws or connector screws Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Startup and Maintenance Precautions CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the module Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire Do not drop or apply strong shock to the module Doing so may damage the module Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing a module Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction After the first use of the product do not connect disconnect the terminal block more than 50 times in accordance with IEC 61131 2 Before handling the module or connection cables touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Startup and maintenance of a control panel must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel with knowledge of protection against electric shock Lock the control panel so that only qualified maintenance personnel can operate it Disposal Precautions CAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT 1 Mitsubishi prog
227. over 15V Doing so can cause breakdown of the elements 4 Current input characteristics The following graph shows the current input characteristics Practical analog input range Digital output value a eS ee 30 20 10 0 4 10 20 30 Analog input current mA No Input range setting Offset value Digital output value Maximum resolution 0 to 16000 4 i 3 User range setting 2 1 16000 to 16000 1uA 20 to 20mA sa Set the offset value and gain value in the user range setting within the range satisfying the following conditions If the following conditions are not satisfied A D conversion may not be properly performed e Gain value lt 20mA offset value gt 20mA e Gain value Offset value gt 16mA e 20 84mA Gain value Offset value x 2 2 When the analog input value exceeds the range of digital output values the digital output value is fixed to the maximum or minimum value Digital output value Input range setting 0 to 20mA 384 4 to 20mA 3 User range setting 2 16384 20 to 20mA E The extension A D converter module does not support User range 2 Point Use the value within the practical analog input range and practical digital output range If a value is out of the range the maximum resolution and accuracy may not fall within the range of performance specifications Do not use the value in the dotted line region in the graph of current input characteristics 16383 U
228. ovides A D conversion in accordance with Trigger conversion request that is input Point This function can be used only when the drive mode is set to trigger conversion mode Every time Trigger conversion request RY19 RY29 is turned on from off the A D converter module performs A D conversion once for each channel where A D conversion is enabled 1 Combination with the external signal assignment function In combination with the external signal assignment function this function initiates A D conversion by trigger conversion request just at the timing of turning on a remote input signal of an extension input module from off For the external signal assignment function refer to the following e External Signal Assignment Function Page 146 Section 8 18 2 Point An extension input module is required when the trigger conversion function is used with the external signal assignment function 2 Restrictions The following table lists the restrictions on the trigger conversion function Function name Restrictions Performs the sampling processing A ai a The setting of Averaging process setting will be ignored The conversion speed is determined by the value of Conversion speed setting as in the following e With Conversion speed setting set to a value of 100us 100us channel e With Conversion speed setting set to a value of 400us or 1ms 400us channel For the conversion timing refer to the following
229. owing window i The process Parameter read will be executed targeting the selected parameters The operation of the slave station may be change by the execution of the process Parameter read Also it may overwrite the device value of the PLC CPU refreshing the remote V O and remote registers Please confirm safety before the execution Please confirm that the connected PLC is correct Please confirm that the CC IE Field module is set correctly Please confirm that the target slave station is correct Do you want to execute SS ae D Click Yes button The parameters are read from the A D converter module Name EEE Read Value Ei gt 40Qus ia xF FFF Ea xFFFF xFFFF xFFFF on xFFFF 8 Set Method selection to Parameter write Method selection Parameter write gt Parameter Information S19 WLJed 94 ebueyyD 0 MOH Z 9 Set Write Value Follow the next steps to set the value e Click the title cell of Read Value to select all the items and copy them e Click the title cell of Write Value to select all the items and paste the copy e Select the items to be changed and set new values O Name o o o oaee Pead Vale 0 40 us ME Ox FFF Ox FFF OxFFF 0xFFF E E is OxFFF a Eo 81 10 Click Execute button to open the following window The process Parameter write will be executed targeting the selected parameters The operation of the
230. per limit value 0 I Disable In Basic module parameter specify the values for CHO Process alarm upper upper limit value CHO Process alarm upper lower limit value CHO Process alarm lower upper limit value and CHO Process alarm lower lower limit value Name Tnitial Value Read write Value E Alert output function ex CH1 Alert output setting t Disable Enable fe GH1 Process alarm upper upper limit value O00 FE H GH1 Process alarm upper lower limit value 000 10000 te GH1 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 00 ren OHI Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 0 In Basic module parameter set Alert output signal assignment to 0x002A The string 2A is derived from RY2A W E External signal assignment function H Trigger conversion signal assignment IxFFFF B H Input signal error detection signal assienme IF FFF i Oo H Alert output signal assignment ee ElF RIE EALES Point 148 Signals other than remote I O signals assigned to the external module cannot be set with the external signal assignment function Such a setting would result in the error code 017 AH being stored in Latest error code RWr0 Error flag RXA turning on and the ERR LED turning on Multiple remote I O signals of the main module cannot be assigned to a remote output signal of the extension module If the above is set the error code 0180H is stored in Latest error code RWr0 Er
231. potential difference between the AG terminal and the external device GND Is the network synchronous communication setting Synchronous or Asynchronous changed in the network configuration setting Is an inter module synchronous interrupt program prepared when the CC Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function is used together with the inter module synchronization function on the MELSEC iQ R series Point Action Identify the faulty area of signal lines by a visual check and a continuity check Change the status of the CPU module to RUN Check if the offset gain setting is correct If the user range is used change the input range to any of the default settings and then check if the A D conversion is performed properly If the A D conversion is properly executed configure the offset gain setting again Verify Range setting address 0103H by using the engineering tool or the dedicated instruction If the input range setting is incorrect set the range again by engineering tool or program Check A D conversion enable disable setting address 0102H by using the engineering tool or the dedicated instruction Then set A D conversion to be enabled by program or engineering tool Turn on and off Initial data setting request flag RY9 using the engineering tool to check if the digital operation value is stored in CHO Digital operation value RWr2 to RWr5 When the problem has been solved check the program again
232. pper limit value and the scaling lower limit value both of which are set at desired values Adds the conversion value shift amount specified to a digital operation value and stores it into the remote register This function facilitates fine adjustment at the system start up Allows the maximum value and the minimum value of a digital output value to be fixed at 16000 and 0 or 16000 respectively if a voltage or current exceeding the input range is input Page 108 Section 8 11 Page 113 Section 8 12 Page 117 Section 8 13 Item Difference conversion function Trigger conversion function CC Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function Error notification function Functions with an extension I O module connected Functions with an extension analog module connected CC Link IE Field Network diagnostic function CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Available or not Description Reference Subtracts the difference conversion reference value from a digital operation value and stores the obtained Page 122 Section 8 14 value into the remote register Provides A D conversion in accordance with the input of Trigger conversion request Trigger conversion request that is input to the e fe Page 127 Section 8 15 x extension input module via an external device also Performs A D conversion with a synchronization period of the master station that supports the CC Link IE Field Network synchronous communication
233. r Extension analog module receive data error Extension analog module send data error A bit corresponding to any channel of Input signal error detection setting address 0209H has been set to a value other than the setting range O indicates the number of the channel where an error has occurred A channel where the input range is other than the following is set to Disconnection detection 4H in Input signal error detection setting address 0209H e 4 to 20mA e 1to 5V O indicates the number of the channel where an error has occurred The values set in CH1 Scaling lower limit value address 0221H to CH4 Scaling upper limit value address 0228H are out of the range of 32000 to 32000 O indicates the number of the channel where an error has occurred CH1 Scaling lower limit value address 0221H to CH4 Scaling upper limit value address 0228H have been set as follows Scaling lower limit value gt Scaling upper limit value O indicates the number of the channel where an error has occurred The number of A D conversion enabled channels is too large to accommodate all the channels in the synchronization period set in the master station The extension module is not connected properly or the connected extension module itself is not supported The model name reflecting the parameter is different from that of the connected extension module The data received from the extension analog module is abnormal
234. r Fares eae he PL PLC CPU or information on items not displayed on the screen please re fer to the manual 168 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 4 Inthe window that appears shown left click Yes button The process Error history read will be executed The operation of the slave station may be change by the execution of the process Error history read Also it may overwrite the device value of the PLC CPU refreshing the remote I O and remote registers Please confirm safety before the execution Please confirm that the connected PLC is correct Please confirm that the CC IE Field module is set correctly Please confirm that the target slave station is correct Do you want to execute 5 In the window that appears shown left click button 6 The error history of the main A D converter module and the extension module is displayed in Target Module Information y72GF2B 60AD4 NZ2EX2B 60AD4 Start I O No 0000 Station No 1 i LL Method selection Error history read The error history is read from the target module Executi on Res u It Command Setting There is no command setting in the selected process Execution Result Name Read Value Unit Description Error history 1 read Error and Solution Order of generation Error time First two digits of the year Last two digits of the year Error time Month Day Error time Hour Minute Error time Seco
235. r limit value ie OH Scaling enable disable setting E o lO Enable 1 Digable 1 Disable 4 in Basic module parameter set the values in CHO Scaling upper limit value and CHO Scaling lower limit value H O Sealine function eee GH1 Scaling enable disable setting l Disable a iia GH1 scaling upper limit value SSS R 1600 ve GH1 Scaling lower limit value Oo a Item Setting range CHO Scaling upper limit value 32000 to 32000 CHO Scaling lower limit value Point Even if the scaling upper limit value and the scaling lower limit value are set so that the change is larger than the maximum resolution described in the performance specifications the resolution will not increase Scaling settings must meet the following condition Scaling upper limit value gt Scaling lower limit value uonoun4 pules 11 9 For the extension A D converter module make the settings for each item of Ext module 1_ Module parameter 109 110 4 Example of the scaling setting Iy 1 For the channel with the set input range of 0 to 5V of the main A D converter module settings are made as follows e CHO Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable e CHO Scaling upper limit value 12000 e CHO Scaling lower limit value 4000 EO Sealine function eee GH1 Scaling enable disable setting 1 Disable a iia fee GH Scaling upper limit value Sa 12000 eee GH Sca
236. r module Extension A D converter module Maximum value minimum value reset request RY1D RY2D 7 External power supply monitor request flag Turn on this signal to activate the external power supply monitoring function For the timing OFF ON gt OFF refer to the following External power supply monitor state flag Page 196 Appendix 1 1 11 a Device number The device number of this output signal is as follows Signal name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module External power supply monitor request flag RY1F 200 APPENDICES Appendix 2 Details of Remote Registers This section describes the details of the remote registers for a master local module The described assignment of device numbers assumes that the remote registers of the main module are assigned to RWr0 to RWrF and RWw0 to RWwF 1 Latest error code An error code is stored when a moderate error or major error occurs Turning on Error clear request flag RYA after eliminating the cause of the error clears the error code Errors that occurred in the past can be checked with Error history O address OAOOH to OAEFH For the error history refer to the following e Error history datadi fs Page 222 Appendix 3 23 a Device number The device number of this remote register is as follows Remote register name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Latest error code RWr0 2 Latest warning code An error c
237. r of channels used the number of channels where A D conversion is enabled Takes in digital operation values a set number of times at every sampling period and averages these values storing the averaged value into the remote register The target range for average processing moves at each sampling thereby allowing the latest digital operation value to be obtained Allows the input range to be selected for each channel from the following e Factory default range 4 to 20mA 0 to 20mA 1 to 5V 0 to 5V 10 to 10V range user range setting 1 user range setting Available x Not available Available or not Dain extension Reference Page 89 Section 8 4 Page 89 Section 8 5 Page 95 Section 8 6 1 Page 95 Section 8 6 2 a Page 96 Section 8 6 2 b Page 97 Section 8 6 2 c Page 99 Section 8 7 Allows the correction of errors in digital output values GO O O a Page 83 Section 7 3 For each channel stores the maximum and minimum values of digital operation values into the remote buffer memory Detects a disconnection of analog input signals a disconnection of Detects a disconnection of analog input signals input signals O Page 101 Section 8 9 Outputs an alert when a digital operation value falls P g P Page 105 Section 8 10 within the alert output range set in advance Performs scale conversion on a digital operation value within the range of the scaling u
238. r status or an alert status can be output from the extension output module These input and output are not affected by the sequence scan and link scan Ex To turn on the lamp when an error occurs An error signal occurred in the A D converter module can be output to the extension output module directly Z Error lamp amp external device Main A D converter module Extension output module Programming is not necessary to turn on an error lamp when an error occurs 8 Support for the CC Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function A D conversion can be performed together with the synchronization period of the master station that supports the CC Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function This enables the A D converter module to operate at the same timing of other slave stations sharing the same network CHAPTER 1 A D CONVERTER MODULE 9 Various installation methods The module can be installed in six directions using a DIN rail DIN rail Horizontal installation upside down Horizontal installation Upward installation 10 Easy module replacement The terminal block for module power supply and FG and the terminal block for analog input signals have a two piece structure where the module can be replaced with the wire connected In addition the terminal block for analog input signals has a lift up structure where the terminal block li
239. r to the following e Alert Output Function Process Alarm 5 Page 105 Section 8 10 a Setting range e Setting range is 32768 to 32767 e The settings consist of the four items process alarm upper upper limit value process alarm upper lower limit value process alarm lower upper limit value and process alarm lower lower limit value b Enabling the setting Turn on and off Initial data setting request flag RY9 to enable the setting c Default value The default value is O d Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory addresses of this area are as follows Extension A D converter module Remote buffer memory name CHO Process alarm lower lower limit value CHO Process alarm lower upper limit value Main A D converter module CH1 H H H H1 H CH3 CH4 O N O oO O N O O N CHO Process alarm upper lower limit value 0111H 0115H 0119H 011DH 0211H 0215H 0219H 021DH 0112H 0116H 011AH 011EH 0212H 0216H 021AH 021EH CHO Process alarm upper upper limit value Point An error occurs in a channel with a set value out of the range above or a set value not meeting the following condition Process alarm upper upper limit value gt Process alarm upper lower limit value gt Process alarm lower upper limit value gt Process alarm lower lower limit value An error results in the error code 06 AOH or 16A 0H being stored in Latest error code RWr0 Error flag RXA turning on and the ERR LED lighting up r
240. r upper limit value gt Process alarm upper lower limit value 4 Process alarm upper lower limit value gt Process alarm upper upper limit value Turn off and on the module power supply If this error persists the failure of the module is a possible cause Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Adjust the value of Range setting address 0203H to fall within the range Set the averaging time to a value in the range of 2 to 5000ms Adjust the time average value to be equal to or greater than 4 x Sampling period ms Adjust the count average value to fall within the range of 4 to 65000 times Set the moving average count to a value in the range of 2 to 128 Adjust the settings in CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value address O20FH to CH4 Process alarm upper upper limit value address 021EH Error code hexadecimal 18100H 1820H 1900H 19101H 1E40H 2 1FOOH 1F30H 1F50H 1F60H Classification Erorname Description and cause Moderate error Moderate error Moderate error Moderate error Moderate error Major error Moderate error Major error Major error Input signal error detection setting out of range Disconnection detection setting error Scaling setting out of range Scaling setting upper lower limit inversion Excessive number of conversion enabled channels Extension module connection error Extension module parameter erro
241. r12 to RWr18 2950 X10001 0 X210 X 510 X 2000 X2100 X3250 X 50 X 100 CHU Difference conversion state flag ON RX14 to RX17 RX24 to RX27 OFF Maximum value minimum value CHO Maximum value pie Seite eee ee S after the start of difference conversion _ _ l address 0601H 0603H 0605H 0607H 10001X10004M 000110001 10001 X10001 K 2100 X 3250 X3250X 3250 1601H 1603H 1605H 1607H l CHO Minimum value l address 0602H 0604H 0606H 0608H C600 X600 0 Y o X o X ol Y2100X2100X 50 Y 50 1602H 1604H 1606H 1608H Dm gosh A ee fh E E A E ee eee E J Maximum value minimum value reset request D RY1D RY2D OFF OFF Maximum value minimum value reset SN completed flag RX1D RX2D OFF OFF d Operation with the averaging processing set If the difference conversion starts while the averaging processing is set the digital output value at the completion of the averaging processing is determined as the difference conversion reference value In addition CHO Difference conversion state flag RX14 to RX17 RX24 to RX27 changes to Converting difference ON Point The difference conversion function can be started at any timing When the difference conversion function is used with the digital clipping function scaling function and shift function each processed digital operation value is determined as a difference conversion reference value CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 15 Trigger Conversion Function This function pr
242. raging process setting tee Hd Time average Count averaged Moving average 0 Sampling processing Sampling processing 1 Time average 2 Gount average Sampling processing J Moving average I 0 Sampling processing 0 to 65000 Point For the extension A D converter module make the settings for each item of Ext module 1_Module parameter 97 poya UDISI AUOD A V 9 8 b Averaging processing 1 Set Method selection to Parameter write X CC IE Field Configuration window gt Select the main A D converter module from List of stations gt CC IE Field Configuration gt Online gt Parameter Processing of Slave Station 2 In Basic module parameter set CHO A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable O 4 0 conversion enable disable setting eee OH A D conversion enable disable setting tee OH A D conversion enable disable setting eee OHS A D conversion enable disable setting GH 4 1 conversion enable disable setting 0 Enable 0 Enable eae l Enable ENTE 1 Digable 3 In Basic module parameter specify the type of averaging processing for CHO Averaging process setting E Averaging process zetting Ha GH Averaging process setting GHI Time average Gount average Moving average Ha GH Averaging process setting CH Time average Gount averages Moving average Ha GHE Averaging process setting CHS Time average Dount a
243. rameter set CHO Input signal error detection setting to 4 Disconnection detection El Input signal error detection function ree CH1 Input signal error detection setting 0 Di H GHA Input signal error detection setting 0 Digable H OHS Input signal error detection setting 0 Digable tee CH4 Input signal error detection setting 0 Digable Point For the extension A D converter module make the settings for each item of Ext module 1_ Module parameter CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 10 Alert Output Function Process Alarm This function outputs an alert when a digital operation value falls within the alert output range set in advance The following figure schematically shows how the alert output behaves in the main A D converter module Warning output range Out of warning output range e Included Digital operation value Alert issued menses 1 Upper upper limit value ANASON Upper lower N limit value N Alert canceled Alert canceled CH1 Digital Y i operation value Y Alert canceled Lower upper limit value G44 Digital __ y operation value Lower lower limit value ari V Alert issued ON Time Alert output flag CH1 upper limit value OFF OFF RWrB b0 i i ON Alert output flag CH1 lower limit value OFF OFF RWrB b1 i o Alert output flag CH2 upper limit value OFF OFF x O Alert output signal OFF OFF RX18 T 5 Light A x 5 a il a we Xa a Lights up
244. rammable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT 2 The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in e Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT e Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User e Aircraft or Aerospace Medi
245. rations e Turning on and off Error clear request flag RYA e Turning on and off Initial data setting request flag RY9 Mode switch setting change error code 0920H is not cleared even if five seconds has passed since the error occurred During the error the operation continues in the mode previous to the change of Mode switch address 0000H To clear the error staying in the previous mode set Mode switch address 0000H back to the original value and then turn on and off Initial data setting request flag RY9Q Turning on and off Error clear request flag RYA or Initial data setting request flag RY9 does not clear this error The error is cleared only by the method described in the action column Point For two or more errors only the latest error code is stored in Latest error code RWr0 or Latest warning code RWr1 The errors that have occurred in the past can be checked in the error history of the engineering tool For the error history refer to the following e Checking by executing a command of the slave station Page 168 Section 11 1 1 e Error history data Page 222 Appendix 3 23 2 a Communication errors where the D LINK LED flashes or turns off Error code CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code list D000H to DFFFH D529H and D52BH excluded While any of these errors occurs the ERR LED does not turn on Based on the behavior of the D LINK LED at the occurrence of an error the errors are
246. rcuit fire or malfunction Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction Place the cables in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise When disconnecting the cable from the module do not pull the cable by the cable part For the cable with connector hold the connector part of the cable For the cable connected to the terminal block loosen the terminal screw Pulling the cable connected to the module may result in malfunction or damage to the module or cable When an overcurrent caused by an error of an external device or a failure of the programmable controller flows for a long time it may cause smoke and fire To prevent this configure an external safety circuit such as a fuse Mitsubishi programmable controllers must be installed in control panels Wiring and replacement of a module must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel with knowledge of protection against electric shock For wiring methods refer to INSTALLATION AND WIRING in this manual Startup and Maintenance Precautions WARNING Do n
247. reakdown occurs in the internal resistance of the module The maximum input current value for constant application is 24mA Do not connect two or more wires to the terminal The module operates at the conversion speed of a main analog module For details refer to the following e Conversion Speed and Sampling Period Page 90 Section 8 5 1 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 3 How to Calculate Current Consumption The total current consumption of the modules is calculated by summing the module power supply current in the main A D converter module and extension module For the value of the module power supply current refer to the specifications of each module e Performance specifications of main A D converter module Page 25 Section 3 2 1 e Performance specifications of extension A D converter module L Page 27 Section 3 2 2 e Performance specifications of extension I O module LA CC Link IE Field Network Remote I O Module User s Manual e Performance specifications of extension D A converter module LA CC Link IE Field Network Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual The value of the module power supply current in the extension module described in the specifications is the value of the module power supply current supplied from the main A D converter module Main A D converter module Extension module NZ2GF2BN 60AD4 NZ2EX2B1 16T 240mA Module power supply current Module power supply current Total current con
248. ring and diagnosing the A D converter module requires GX Works2 or GX Works3 According the master station used install the following version of GX Works2 or GX Workss3 Engineering tool Software version GX Works2 Version 1 525X or later GX Works3 Version 1 005F or later 49 CHAPTER INSTALLATION AND WIRING This chapter describes the installation and wiring of the A D converter module 6 1 Station Number Setting 1 Setting method Set the station number with the rotary switch on the front of the module Set the station number in the power off state because the set value is enabled at power on e The dial x10 is used to set the hundreds and tens place of a station number e The dial x1 is used to set the ones place of a station number Ex For the station number 115 set the switch as shown below 2 Setting range Set the station number which can be from 1 to 120 A value other than 1 to 120 causes a communication error resulting in the D LINK LED flashing Point While the module power supply is in an on state changing the station number setting switch causes a minor error resulting in the ERR LED flashing When the station number setting switch is set back to the previous state the module recovers from the error after five seconds resulting in the ERR LED turning off For the station number setting avoid duplication with the other station numbers Number duplication causes a communication error which does not
249. rnet cables normal Do the switching hub and other stations used in the system operate normally 9 When the ERR LED turns on Check item Does any error occur CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Action e Check if 1OOOBASE T compliant Ethernet cables are used QA User s manual for the master local module used e Check if the station to station distance is 100m or less e Check if the Ethernet cables are not disconnected Check if the power supplies of the switching hub and other stations are turned on Action Identify the error factor of the A D converter module with the engineering tool to take the corrective action Page 168 Section 11 1 10 When the ALM LED turns on or flashes a When ALM LED turns on Check item Has an alert been issued in the main A D converter module Has an alert been issued in the extension A D converter module Has an alert been issued in the extension D A converter module b When the ALM LED flashes Check item Has an input signal error occurred in the main A D converter module Has an input signal error occurred in the extension A D converter module Has a digital value out of range error occurred in the extension D A converter module Action Check Alert output flag RWrB Check Alert output flag RWr1B Check Alert output flag RWr1A Action Check Input signal error detection flag RWrA Check Input signal error detection flag RWr1A Check Setting value check
250. ror code RWr0 Page 171 Section 11 1 2 e Checking by Latest warning code RWr1 Page 171 Section 11 1 3 Alarm codes can be checked by any of the following methods e Checking by executing a command of the slave station Page 168 Section 11 1 1 e Checking by Latest warning code RWr1 Page 171 Section 11 1 3 1 Checking by executing a command of the slave station The procedure below shows how to check the errors by executing a command of the slave station 1 On the CC IE Field Configuration window from Lh z ww Ea Giz View Close with Discarding the Setting List of stations select the main A D converter Mode Setting online Normal Mode Assignment Method sta module Station Type 1 Remote Device Station Station list 2 Open the Command Execution of Slave Station window X CC IE Field Configuration gt Online gt Command Execution of Slave Station 3 Set Method selection to Error history read and click Execute button Target Module Information 72GF2B 60AD4 NZ2EX2B 60AD4 Start I O No 0000 Station No 1 The error history is read from the target module There is no command setting in the selected process The refreshed device values of remote I O or remote r registers s may be overwri Pacem PLC CPU by using the current connection destination Fe ki Gaal oe Process is executed according to the pa
251. ror flag RXA turns on and the ERR LED turns on The external signal assignment function cannot be used together with the digital output HOLD CLEAR function When Digital output HOLD CLEAR setting is set to 1 HOLD the setting is ignored and the A D converter module operates with 0 CLEAR set CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS c Operation when an error occurs Depending on whether the remote I O signals of the extension I O module are used as general purpose I O signals or assigned for the external signal assignment function the operation of the A D converter module for an error differs as shown in the following table Remote l O signal Remote input RX Remote output RY Digital output ROED CEAR CLEAR HOLD setting function Ext I si I i t x xterna eng cee i Not assigned Assigned Not assigned Not assigned Assigned 1 Minor error Same as the normal operation Same as the normal operation Same as the normal operation Same as the Same as the Same as the Moderate error Clear Clear Clear normal operation normal operation normal operation ee eed converter module In disconnection or the CPU Same as the Same as the f Same as the Clear Clear l Hold 2 l module being in normal operation normal operation normal operation STOP status 4 When the external signal assignment function is used the operation of the A D converter module is the same as that of when the CLEAR is set for the digital output HOLD CLEAR setting function even if HOL
252. rque range for terminal screw M2 5 screw 0 5 to 0 6N m 18 point two piece terminal block M3 screw I O part Tightening torque range for terminal screw M3 screw x 5 2 0 43 to 0 57N m Applicable DIN rail TH35 7 5Fe TH35 7 5Al compliant with IEC 60715 Applicable wire For power supply Core 0 5 to 1 5mmi 20 to 16 AWG size For I O Core 0 3 to 2 0mm 22 to 14 AWG 25 Applicable solderless terminal Cyclic transmission Item Terminal block for module power supply and FG 4 Terminal block for analog input signals RX RY points RWr RWw points Communication cable Applicability of extension module External power supply Weight 26 4 2 3 4 D Description TE 0 5 10 NICHIFU Co Ltd Applicable wire size 0 5mn1 TE 0 75 10 NICHIFU Co Ltd Applicable wire size 0 75mn1 TE 1 0 10 NICHIFU Co Ltd Applicable wire size 0 9 to 1 0mnt TE 1 5 10 NICHIFU Co Ltd Applicable wire size 1 25 to 1 5mm Al 0 5 10WH Phoenix Contact Co Ltd Applicable wire size 0 5mm Al 0 75 10GY Phoenix Contact Co Ltd Applicable wire size 0 75mni Al 1 10RD Phoenix Contact Co Ltd Applicable wire size 1 0mm Al 1 5 10BK Phoenix Contact Co Ltd Applicable wire size 1 5mm RAV1 25 3 compliant with JIS C 2805 Applicable wire size 0 3 to 1 25mm V2 MS3 JST Mfg Co Ltd Applicable wire size 1 25 to 2 0mm RAP2 3SL Nippon Tanshi Co Ltd Applicable wir
253. rsion is stored in CHO Digital operation value RWr2 to RWr5 RWr12 to RWr15 UO IOUN 4 UOISISAUOD SOUSZIONIG Y4Q 123 3 Points for the use of the difference conversion function a Operation when an input signal error occurs In the event of an input signal error changing CHO Difference conversion trigger RY14 to RY17 RY24 to RY27 from No request OFF to Trigger request ON does not allow difference conversion to start After the analog input value returns within the setting range change CHO Difference conversion trigger RY 14 to RY17 RY24 to RY27 from No request OFF to Trigger request ON again If an input signal error occurs in the status of Trigger request ON the difference conversion starts just when the analog input value returns within the setting value treating the digital output value as the difference conversion reference value Detection range Out of detection range Included Analog input value mA e Digital operation value a a ea an ela a pe pe rai Limited to the minimum value External input of a digital operation value mA l l Input signal error is occurring y l Time 0 Timing at the time of l a a returning from the input signal error to a normal value l Bit of the corresponding channel of Input oN signal error detection flag OFF l RWrA RWr1A Input signal error detection signal OFF RX1C RX2C ON CHO A D conversion completed flag RX10 to RX13
254. rt output signal RY28 Use prohibited RX29 Trigger conversion completed flag RY29 Trigger conversion request RX2A Use prohibited RY2A Trigger conversion completed clear request RX2B Use prohibited RY2B Use prohibited RX2C Input signal error detection signal RY2C Use prohibited Maximum value minimum value reset a RX2D RY2D Maximum value minimum value reset request completed flag RX2E Use prohibited RY2E Use prohibited RX2F External power supply READY flag RY2F Use prohibited Point Do not use any Use prohibited remote I O signals If any of the signals are used correct operation of the module cannot be guaranteed 34 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 6 List of Remote Registers This section lists remote registers for a master local module The remote register assignment shown assumes that the remote registers of the main module are assigned to RWr0 to RWrF and RWw0 to RWwF Remote register RWr is the information input from A D converter module to master local module Remote register RWw is the information output from master local module to A D converter module The remote registers of the main A D converter module and extension module are assigned as shown below aa VA e A NE A E Main A D converter module Extension module Module Remote register RWr Remote register RWw Main A D converter module RWr0 to RWrF RWw0 to RWwF Extension module
255. rved stations bl isable Ti View station numbers set to error invalid station and Error Invalid Station temporary error invalid station Selected Station Operation k CPU status of the selected station be checked by starting system monitor of the selected sta 6 Remote Operation Reset the selected station Item to be diagnosed Description Reference Allows the condition of the CC Link IE Field Network to be checked If an error or a warning occurs in the A D converter module an icon appears to show the status of the station Display of selected station aa 4 2 l The communication status of the station selected in Networks Status can be checked status and error details Communication Test The transient communication route and whether the communication is established from the connected station to the destination station can be checked The reaching time and the route of the IP communication from the connected station to IP Communication Test the target station can be checked The cable status between the connected station and the destination station can be Cable Test checked User s manual for the master local module Link Start Stop The network data link can be started and stopped dsed Network Event History The history of various events that occurred in the network can be checked A reservation for a station can be temporarily cancelled and the cancellation can be Reserved Station Function disable
256. s 4 Detection cycle This function is executed per sampling cycle 5 Clearing the input signal error detection Check that the analog input value returns to a value that is larger than the criteria of disconnection detection and Error flag RXA turns off and then turn on and off Error clear request flag RYA When the input signal error is cleared the A D converter module results in the following state e Input signal error detection flag RWrA RWr1A is cleared e Input signal error detection signal RX1C RX2C turns off e The ALM LED turns off e The alarm code stored in Latest warning code RWr1 is cleared uonoun4 uonoa 2q 10113 JeubIS ndul 6 8 103 104 6 Setting procedure The setting procedure for the main A D converter module is as follows 1 Set Method selection to Parameter write X CC IE Field Configuration window gt Select the main A D converter module from List of stations gt CC IE Field Configuration gt Online gt Parameter Processing of Slave Station 2 In Basic module parameter set CHO A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable E A D conversion enable disable setting eee GH A D conversion enable disable setting 0 Enable GH A D conversion enable disable setting 0 Enable pe OHS A D conversion enable disable setting 0 Enable Db Enable GH 440 conversion enable disable setting i Frahle I Digable 3 In Basic module pa
257. s Communication Function This function performs A D conversion with a synchronization period of the master station that supports the CC Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function This enables the A D converter module to operate at the same timing of other slave stations on the same network 1 Supported versions of the modules and software The table below lists modules and software required to use the CC Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function Module and software Serial number first five digits version of GX Works2 Simple motion module 15092 or later GX Works2 Version 1 525X or later RJ71GF11 T2 or RJ71EN71 no restriction GX Works3 Version 1 005F or later 2 Restrictions This section describes restrictions to use the CC Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function a Restrictions to use this function with other functions Function name Averaging processing Conversion speed switch function Shift function Difference conversion function Extension I O function Cyclic data update watch function Restrictions Performs the sampling processing The setting of Averaging process setting will be ignored The conversion speed is determined by the value of Conversion speed setting as in the following e With Conversion speed setting set to a value of 100us 100us channel e With Conversion speed setting set to a value of 400us or 1ms 400us channel The
258. s ds eg te eh Ge tk ea 57 Applicable systems nananana 49 ADDIICALION s 2rd crite din a Raia Race 2 A 15 Averaging process specification 215 Averaging processing 000 eee ee ee eee 95 CAD SS errada eaa aa a a st Sestak 237 CC Link IE Field Network diagnostic function 152 CC Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function 0000 135 CH1 to CH4 A D conversion completed flag 192 CH1 to CH4 Conversion value shift amount 203 CH1 to CH4 Difference conversion reference value Ss ds ise eat je cite at bey ca EE ccs as ke aa es ES 202 CH1 to CH4 Difference conversion state flag 192 CH1 to CH4 Difference conversion trigger 199 CH1 to CH4 Digital operation value 201 CHT 1O GHA EED 33 aia Paccnee ad eee amp are HE 21 CH1 to CH4 Maximum value 221 CH1 to CH4 Minimum value 221 CH1 to CH4 Process alarm lower lower limit value EE OET E E EE E TE E ATA 218 CH1 to CH4 Process alarm lower upper limit value Sarake det Cod a 60 ents rt 08 a0 O E a E Ae Seabed 218 CH1 to CH4 Process alarm upper lower limit value EE a tec au std ees oes nas sche ae a ene ed 218 CH1 to CH4 Process alarm upper upper limit value Bd enh dees aap Mate ode Mauna tesa as SAS ay cs ae oak Ae 218 CH1 to CH4 Scaling lower limit value 220 CH1 to CH4 Scaling upper limit value 220 CH1 to CH4 Time average Count average Moving average
259. se modes are shown below Power on Offset gain setting mode Unit test mode Drive mode switch Synchronous Normal mode Trigger conversion mode communication mode Condition UQ JOMOd Je HIUS PON L8 If X10 of the station number setting switch is set to O G the mode shifts to offset gain setting mode For details refer to the following e Offset Gain Setting Page 83 Section 7 3 If X10 of the station number setting switch is set to TEST and X1 of the switch is set to 0 the mode shifts to the unit test mode For details refer to the following e Unit Test Page 185 Section 11 5 b Unit test mode With the station number setting switch set to 1 to 120 the module enters each drive mode according to the setting of Mode switch address 0000H For details refer to the following e Drive Mode Switch K gt Page 86 Section 8 2 c Drive mode switch 85 8 2 Drive Mode Switch The A D converter module operates in the following modes normal mode trigger conversion mode and synchronous communication mode The following table lists the types of drive mode and their operation Type of drive mode Operation Normal mode A D conversion is performed based on the internal clock of the main A D converter module Trigger conversion mode A D conversion is performed at the time of turning on Trigger conversion request RY19 RY29 from off A D conversion is performed with a syn
260. signals T SET SEL button In offset gain setting mode select the set target by pressing A button or V button A cover to protect a connector of an extension module Do not remove the cover if an extension module is not 8 Extension connector cover connected to the connector OFFSET LED green GAIN LED green jnpoy 1 AU0 G Y UIEN L Z 21 1 Module status and LED status The following table shows how module status and LED status correspond each other LED status Module status Data link status am ee D LINK PWLED RUNLED a ERR LED ALMLED O GLED ae a ae a Data link in operation Data link in operation link in Data link in operation On Noimalmada Reserved station specification in Cyclic stop Flashing progress Link stop Cyolicstop stop On Flashing In progress In progress On Flashing Completed Unit test successfully Completed with an error Communication error Cyolicstop stop On Flashing Off Error Alertissued issued Alarm o ut signal error occurred 1 Either On Flashing or Off 2 Either On or Off 3 A failure of the module may not allow the LED to turn on 22 CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES 2 2 Extension A D Converter Module This section describes part names of the extension A D converter module NZ2EX2B 60AD4 Boeoriyty te ym a f 6 s f io 12 7 14 16 Tf 18 a 3 2 4 Mai A A Aa Aa Aa Aa ee An Application
261. sion enabled Conversion Conversion Conversion Conversion channels CH1 to CH4 _ processing i processing __ time __ processing __ time __ processing __ time __ Sampling period of the main A D converter module 100us 100us x 4 800us Sampling period of the extension D A converter module 100us 100us x 4 800us 93 UOI OUN UdIMS peeds UOISJSAUOD G g 4 When an extension A D converter module is connected to a main D A converter module When an extension A D converter module is connected to a main D A converter module the conversion speed is fixed to 100us for the main D A converter module and the extension A D converter module In addition between the conversion processing of each channel processing time 100us is generated Therefore the sampling period of the extension A D converter module is given by the following Sampling period Conversion speed 100us Processing time 100us x Number of conversion enabled channels Assuming that the number of conversion enabled channels is 4 for both the main D A converter module and the extension A D converter module Conversion period of the main D A converter module 100ys 100us 100us 100ys 100us 100us 100us y q 242 er rt Main D A converter module conversion enabled channels CH1 to CH4 k Conversion processing Conversion processing Conversion processing
262. st mode Is it impossible to read out an on or off state of the external input normally if the following actions are taken checking all the items listed above checking the LEDs of the module performing CC IE Field diagnostics by engineering tool and checking the error codes Point Action Check the faulty area by checking signal line visually or conductively Change the status of the CPU module to RUN Verify Range setting address 0203H by using the engineering tool or the dedicated instruction If the input range setting is incorrect set the range again by program or engineering tool Check A D conversion enable disable setting address 0202H by using the engineering tool or the dedicated instruction Then set A D conversion to be enabled by program or engineering tool Turn on and off Initial data setting request flag RY9 using the engineering tool to check if the digital operation value is stored in CHO Digital operation value RWr12 to RWr15 When the problem has been solved check the program again For the current input always connect the terminals V and I referring to the following e Wiring of External Device and Terminal Block L Page 63 Section 6 6 When the time average processing is selected set the value to be not less than Four times x Sampling period If the condition above is not met digital operation values remain 0 Connect the AG terminal and the external device GND If the digital
263. ster local module converter module converter module 9 dwexy Wwesbold 6 2 Programming conditions Here is the programming conditions e Digital operation values resulting from A D conversion of CH1 to CH3 of the main A D converter module are read out to the master station A D conversion takes place at the time of sampling processing for CH1 averaging processing every 50 times for CH2 and every 10 moving averages for CH3 e Digital operation values resulting from A D conversion of CH1 to CH4 of the extension A D converter module are read out to the master station A D conversion takes place at the time of sampling processing for CH1 and CH4 averaging processing every 50 times for CH2 and every 10 moving averages for CH3 157 3 Initial settings a Station parameter Setting item Setting value Conversion speed setting 2 100us Cyclic data update watch time setting 5 For the parameters other than the above use the initial value b Basic module parameter Setting item Setting value A D conversion enable disable setting CH4 A D conversion enable disable setting 1 Disable CH2 Averaging process setting 2 Count average CH2 Time average Count average Moving average 50 Average processing setting CH3 Averaging process setting 3 Moving average CH3 Time average Count average Moving average 10 CH1 Input signal error detection setting 4 Disconnection detection Input signal error detection function CH3 Input signal error d
264. sumption 210mA 30mA uondwnsuog JUSIIND 9 Je NDIeD 0 MOH 29 3 4 Function List Item A D conversion enable disable function Conversion speed switch function Sampling processing Time average A D conversion method Averaging l Count processing average Moving average Range switching function Offset gain setting function Maximum value minimum value hold function Input signal error detection function Alert output function process alarm Scaling function Shift function Digital clipping function 30 Description Allows A D conversion to be enabled or disabled for each channel Disabling the A D conversion for unused channels reduces the conversion cycles Performs A D conversion on analog input values sequentially storing the digital operation values into the remote register Performs A D conversion for a set period of time and averages the total value excluding the maximum and the minimum values storing the averaged value into the remote register The number of processing times within the set period of time varies depending on the number of channels used number of channels where A D conversion is enabled Performs A D conversion a set number of times and averages the total value excluding the maximum and the minimum values storing the averaged value into the remote register Time taken to store the average value by count average varies depending on the numbe
265. sures including the use of shielded cables for connection 4 When the output status of the extension output module differs from the link device status of the master station Check item Action Check that the following assignments are not used in the external signal assignment function e Input signal error detection signal assignment Page 207 Appendix 3 4 e Alert output signal assignment Page 208 Appendix 3 5 e Error flag assignment Page 209 Appendix 3 6 e Warning flag assignment Page 210 Appendix 3 7 Is the setting of the external signal assignment function correct 5 When parameter read or write or CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics fails by engineering tool Check item Action Check the D LINK LED of the main A D converter module and if it is not on perform troubleshooting by referring to the following e When the D LINK LED turns off Page 182 Section 11 4 5 e When the D LINK LED flashes 1 gt Page 182 Section 11 4 6 Check for other LEDs by referring to the following e Checking the LEDs 5 Page 181 Section 11 4 Is the D LINK LED of the main A D converter module on Check the serial number first five digits of the module on the master station and if it is prior to the supported versions replace the module with a module of the supported version For the supported version refer to the following e Supported master station lt Page 49 Section 5 2 1 Is the versi
266. t function Alert output signal assignment Page 146 Section 8 18 1 2 Error flag assignment Warning flag assignment Cyclic data update watch time setting Input response time setting Page 145 Section 8 18 1 Digital output HOLD CLEAR setting Extension I O setting e Basic module parameter Setting item Reference CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting CH2 A D conversion enable disable setting A D conversion enable disable setting Page 89 Section 8 4 CH3 A D conversion enable disable setting CH4 A D conversion enable disable setting CH1 Range setting l CH2 Range setting l Range setting Page 99 Section 8 7 CH3 Range setting CH4 Range setting 72 CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS Setting item Reference CH1 Averaging process setting CH1 Time average Count average Moving average CH2 Averaging process setting CH2 Time average Count average Moving average Averaging process setting Page 95 Section 8 6 CH3 Averaging process setting CH3 Time average Count average Moving average CH4 Averaging process setting CH4 Time average Count average Moving average CH1 Input signal error detection setting CH2 Input signal error detection setting Input signal error detection function Page 101 Section 8 9 CH3 Input signal error detection setting CH4 Input signal error detection setting CH1 Alert output setting CH1 Process alarm upper upper limit value CH1 Process alarm upper lower limit value CH1 Process alarm lower upper limi
267. t value CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value CH2 Alert output setting CH2 Process alarm upper upper limit value CH2 Process alarm upper lower limit value CH2 Process alarm lower upper limit value CH2 Process alarm lower lower limit value Alert output function Page 105 Section 8 10 CH3 Alert output setting CH3 Process alarm upper upper limit value CH3 Process alarm upper lower limit value CH3 Process alarm lower upper limit value CH3 Process alarm lower lower limit value CH4 Alert output setting CH4 Process alarm upper upper limit value CH4 Process alarm upper lower limit value CH4 Process alarm lower upper limit value CH4 Process alarm lower lower limit value suas sojowesed Z CH1 Digital clipping enable disable setting CH2 Digital clipping enable disable setting Digital clipping function Page 117 Section 8 13 CH3 Digital clipping enable disable setting CH4 Digital clipping enable disable setting CH1 Scaling enable disable setting CH1 Scaling upper limit value CH1 Scaling lower limit value CH2 Scaling enable disable setting CH2 Scaling upper limit value CH2 Scaling lower limit value Scaling function Page 108 Section 8 11 CH3 Scaling enable disable setting CH3 Scaling upper limit value CH3 Scaling lower limit value CH4 Scaling enable disable setting CH4 Scaling upper limit value CH4 Scaling lower limit value 13 e Ext module 1_Module parameter Setting item Ext module 1_CH1 A D convers
268. tal Analog Converter Module User s Manual 90 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 1 When an extension module is not connected or an extension I O module is connected The sampling period is given by the following Sampling period Conversion speed x Number of conversion enabled channels Exc Assuming that the conversion speed setting is 100us and the number of conversion enabled channels is Sampling period of the main A D converter module 100ys 100ys CH3 1 CH4 Conversion A Conversion processing processing 2 When an extension A D converter module is connected to a main A D converter module When an extension A D converter module is connected to a main A D converter module processing time 100s is generated between the conversion processing of each channel 100us 100ys 100ys 100us 100us 100ys CH1 i CH2 CH3 l CH4 l CH1 CH2 Conversion A Conversion A Conversion i Conversion A Conversion processing processing processing i processing processing Conversion Sampling period of the main A D converter module 100us x 4 400us Main A D converter module conversion enabled channels CH1 to CH4 processing a With a conversion speed of 100us Between the conversion processing 100us of each channel processing time 100us is generated Therefore the sampling period is given by the following Sampling period Conversion speed 100us Processing time 100us x N
269. tation number out of the Set the station number within the allowable range range has been set range a value other than 1 to 120 b Communication errors where the D LINK LED does not change Error code Description and cause Action D217H D2A0H D2A3H DFO1H This type of communication error results in no change of the D LINK LED These errors are not shown in CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics because they are automatically recovered after the occurrence Troubleshooting them requires the error history to be read out Page 168 Section 11 1 1 JSI OPOD JON ZL Transient data request The transient data request Correct the request command at the transient request source and command error command is incorrect execute the command again e Check the network status using CC Link IE Field Network There is an overload of the diagnostics of the engineering tool to take the appropriate action received transient data e If the received transient data of the target station is overloaded leave the send source for a certain time and try to send the data The received transient data is Correct the number of data frame length at the request source and Transient data length error incorrect retry the execution Set the transient data size that the module can accomodate and modify the transient data to the one that is not split Then send it again Receive buffer full error The received transient data is
270. ter module Warning flag assignment 0006H Point Setting a value out of the range results in the error code 0174H being stored in Latest error code RWr0 Error flag RXA turning on and the ERR LED lighting up with the previously set operation 210 APPENDICES 8 Cyclic data update watch time setting This signal is used to set the time to monitor the data update interval of the cyclic transmission watch time A cyclic transmission stop state that persists over the cyclic data update watch time is regarded as being in disconnection where the output status of the extension output module becomes HOLD 1H or CLEAR 0H according to Digital output HOLD CLEAR setting address 0011H For Digital output HOLD CLEAR setting address 0011H refer to the following e Digital output HOLD CLEAR setting Page 213 Appendix 3 10 a Setting range Setting range is Not monitor 0 or 0 1 to 2 seconds 1 to 20 Set the value in increments of 100ms 1 b Enabling the setting Turn on and off Initial data setting request flag RYQ to enable the setting c Default value The default value is Not monitor 0 d Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory address of this area is as follows Remote buffer memory name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Cyclic data update watch time setting 0007H Point Setting a value out of the range results in the error code 0930H being st
271. the ERR LED lighting up with operation at the previous settings Analog input value A2mAord 5V bt R _ Error detected 2 Notification of an input signal error a For the main A D converter module If the analog input value is satisfied the disconnection detection condition the A D converter module results in the following state and an error is notified e Input signal error detection flag RWrA The bit of the corresponding channel turns on Page 202 Appendix 2 5 e Input signal error detection signal RX1C On e ALM LED of the main module Flashing In addition the alarm code OBAQO is stored in Latest warning code RWr1 b For the extension A D converter module If the analog input value is satisfied the disconnection detection condition the A D converter module results in the following state and an error is notified e Input signal error detection flag RWr1A The bit of the corresponding channel turns on Page 202 Appendix 2 5 e Input signal error detection signal RX2C On e ALM LED of the main module Flashing In addition the alarm code 1BAU is stored in Latest warning code RWr71 For details on alarm codes refer to the following e Alarm Code List Page 180 Section 11 3 102 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 3 How the input signal error detection function operates a For the main A D converter module The digital operation value of the channel in which an error is detected is h
272. the items are included A D converter module WO Whe on i SSS MITSUI ELECTR I A Module The figure above shows the main A D converter module Before Using the Product 14 CHAPTER 1 A D CONVERTER MODULE CHAPTER 1 A D CONVERTER MODULE This chapter describes the application and the features of the A D converter module 1 1 Application The A D converter module converts analog values that are input from external devices to digital operation values A D conversion Analog signal as a continuous amount Digital signal as a discrete sequence The converted digital operation value can be checked in the master station Using the A D converter module allows the flow or temperature measured by the A D converter module to be checked through the master station Master station Master station BAVA AAA ANAS BAVA AAAS uonediddy Main A D converter module Main A D converter module 15 1 2 Features 16 1 Flexible system configuration The employed connection block type provides the combined use of a main module and an extension module A flexible configuration can be achieved because various extension modules can be connected In addition the main module always monitors the connection status of the extension module leading to an early detection of connection failure
273. the minimum value of digital operation values into the following remote buffer memory Remote buffer memory address CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum value value value value value value value value Main A D converter module 0601H 0602H 0603H 0604H 0605H 0606H 0607H 0608H Extension A D converter module 0701H 0702H 0703H 0704H 0705H 0706H 0707H 0708H If averaging processing is specified the values are updated per averaging process cycle Otherwise they are updated Main or extension per sampling cycle 1 Resetting maximum and minimum values e Turning on and off Maximum value minimum value reset request RY1D of the main A D converter module allows the maximum and minimum values of the main A D converter module to be updated to the current values e Turning on and off Maximum value minimum value reset request RY2D of the extension A D converter module allows the maximum and minimum values of the extension A D converter module to be updated to the current values e Turning on and off Initial data setting request flag RY9 allows the maximum and minimum values of both the main A D converter module and the extension A D converter module to be updated to the current values 2 Target of the maximum and minimum values The maximum and minimum values of digital operation values are stored into the remote buffer memory For details refer to the following e Each Function in th
274. the start of this function is 0 because the digital operation value equals to the difference conversion reference value at the start Digital operation value S oe Difference conversion i Digital operation value after difference conversion reference value 122 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 2 How to use difference conversion a Starting difference conversion 1 Change CHO Difference conversion trigger RY14 to RY17 RY24 to RY27 from No request OFF to Trigger request ON The rising edge from No request OFF to Trigger request ON is detected as a trigger When a trigger is detected the digital operation value at the starting point is output to CHO Difference conversion reference value RWr6 to RWr9 RWr16 to RWr19 and the value obtained by subtracting the difference conversion reference value from the digital operation value is stored in CHO Digital operation value RWr2 to RWr5 RWr12 to RWr15 After the storage CHO Difference conversion state flag RX14 to RX17 RX24 to RX27 changes to Converting difference ON b Stopping difference conversion 1 Change CHO Difference conversion trigger RY14 to RY17 RY24 to RY27 from Trigger request ON to No request OFF Change from Trigger request ON to No request OFF results in the difference conversion stopping and CHO Difference conversion state flag RX14 to RX17 RX24 to RX27 changing to Not converted OFF After that the digital output value before difference conve
275. the system configuration including an A D converter module Main A D converter module Extension module 48 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5 2 Applicable Systems 1 Supported master station For the use of an A D converter module select a product for the master station from the following list Model First five digits of serial number RJ71GF11 T2 RJ71EN71 LJ71GF11 T2 QJ71GF11 T2 QD77GF16 14111 or later no restriction 14102 or later A master station other than the above does not allow the use of the A D converter module 2 Connectable modules a Extension modules that can be connected to the main A D converter module Either one of the following extension modules can be connected to the main A D converter module Classification Model Extension input module NZ2EX2B1 16D NZ2EX2B1 16T Extension output module NZ2EX2B1 16TE Extension A D converter module NZ2EX2B 60AD4 Extension D A converter module NZ2EX2B 60DA4 b Main modules to which the extension A D converter module can be connected The extension A D converter module can be connected to either one of the following main modules Classification Model Main A D converter module NZ2GF2BN 60AD4 Main D A converter module NZ2GF2BN 60DA4 SUa SAS ajqeolddy z s 3 Ethernet cables For the specifications of the Ethernet cable refer to the following 7 User s manual for the master local module used 4 Supported software package Configu
276. ting 2 5 to 5V 20 to 20mA CH1 Offset CH1 Gain CH2 Offset CH2 Gain CHS Offset CH3 Gain CH4 Offset CH4 Gain Bues ueDAESHO Z 5 Apply the offset value or gain value to the selected channel for one second or more 83 6 Keep pressing A button until the RUN LED lights PW RUN MODE DLINK ERR ALM up EEEE E E keeppressing A button ll Once the RUN LED lights up release A button While the RUN LED lights up the offset value or gain value is being written to the non volatile memo BREESE amp Data is being written g ry PW RUN MODE DLINK ERR ALM 84 ll After the writing the RUN LED lights out After checking that the RUN LED lights out go to the Hae EE H thewriteis complete next step 7 Toset up another channel go back to step 4 8 After setting all the channels to be used turn off the module power supply Point Set up the offset value and the gain value under actual use conditions Connection to the CC Link IE Field Network is not necessary Set up the offset gain setting in the range satisfying the following condition If the range is exceeded the maximum resolution and accuracy may not fall within the range described in the performance specifications e O Conversion Characteristics of A D Conversion Page 229 Appendix 4 Set values are held and available even after turning off the module power supply because a offset value and a gain value are wr
277. tion CPU status of the selected station can be checked by starting System Monitor system monitor of the selected station Remote Operation Reset the selected station A Are you sure you want to reset the selected station ee 153 uoloun 4 oysoubeq YJOMJON PI Al AU T OO 6L S 3 Inthe dialog box that appears shown below click Reset requested If any changes found for module the following are the possible causes The module status is invalid to accept the request Error might occur 154 CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING This chapter describes the programming of the A D converter module 9 1 Precautions for Programming This section describes precautions when creating the program of CC Link IE Field Network 1 Program for cyclic transmission For a program for cyclic transmission provide interlock between the following link special relay SB and the link special register SW e Data link status of the own station or master station SB0049 e Data link status of each station SWOOBO to SW00B7 For the link special relay SB and link special register SW refer to the following LA User s manual for the master local module used Interlock example 2 Program for transient transmission For a program for transient transmission provide interlock between the following link special relay SB and the PuluweIpold JO SUOIINED
278. tion Transient transmission Description Bit data input from a slave station to the master station For some areas in a local station data are input in the opposite direction User s manual for the master local module used Bit data output from the master station to a slave station For some areas in a local station data are output in the opposite direction User s manual for the master local module used Word data input from a slave station to the master station For some areas in a local station data are input in the opposite direction User s manual for the master local module used Word data output from the master station to a slave station For some areas in a local station data are output in the opposite direction User s manual for the master local module used The abbreviation for ZP REMTO A station reserved for future use This station is not actually connected but counted as a connected station A process of restarting data link when a station recovers from an error The abbreviation for the QD77GF CC Link IE Field Network simple motion module A generic term for stations other than a master station local station remote I O station remote device station and intelligent device station A function of communication with another station which is used when requested by a dedicated instruction or GX Works2 13 PACKING LIST The following items are included in the package of this product Before use check that all
279. tion Setting button Set up the slave station with drag and drop and enter the station number for the slave station Change values as necessary FACCE CCIE Field Configuration Edit View Close with Discarding the Setting Close with Reflecting the Setting Mode Setting Onine Normal Mode z Assignment Method start end Link Scan Time Approx 0 69 ms RXRY Setting RWw RWrSetting tefresh Device Select CCIE Field Find Module My Fi 4 gt Points Start End Points start End RX a e Sta whe pee al No Model Name STA Station Type m ost Statio 5 v ef 1 NZ2GF2B 60AD4 1 Remote Device Station 32 0000 001F 16 0000 000F 16 0020 002F Bund NZ2GF2B 6 NZ2EX 16 0AD4 DO Supplementary Informatio N E Outpu CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS 6 On the CC IE Field Configuration window from List of stations select the main A D converter module CCIEField Configuration Edit View Close with Discarding the Setting Close with Reflecting the Setting Station list lt l a 7 Open the Parameter Processing of Slave Station window KO CC IE Field Configuration gt Online gt Parameter Processing of Slave Station 8 Set Method selection to Parameter read Target Module Information yw72GF2B 60AD4 NZ2EX 16 D0 Start I O No 0000 Station No 1 Method selection Parameter read Parameter write 9 Cl
280. tion information to be initialized oe gt Controlled by the A D converter module Controlled by the program Modul ti Content of module operation Snformation ew Default values information error Module operation information si i Sol initialization command eaandedio x address 1004H Module operation information initialization completed address 1005H b Default value The default value is Not commanded 0 c Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory address of this area is as follows Remote buffer memory name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Modul tion inf tion initializati ule operation information initialization 1004H a command Aowa JOLING 3Jow y jo sjiejaq X ipu ddy 22 228 29 Module operation information initialization completed This memory area shows whether the module operation information stored in the non volatile memory is initialized or not b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi OOOOOOHOHOQ DOS The values of b1 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Not ones 1 Completed a Behavior of module operation information initialization Upon the completion of initializing the module operation information Module operation information initialization completed address 1005H turns to Completed 1 For the timing Not performed 0 Completed 1 gt Not performed 0 refer to the following e Module operation inform
281. to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 t bO CH4 CH3 CH2 C rI o 1 Setting value aa User range setting 1 Input range Extension A D converter module User range setting 2 a Enabling the setting Turn on and off Initial data setting request flag RYQ to enable the setting b Default value The default value is 4 to 20mA OH c Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory addresses of this area are as follows Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Range setting 0103H 0203H Remote buffer memory name Point Setting data other than the above results in the error code 0100H or 1100H being stored in Latest error code RWr0 Error flag RXA turning on and the ERR LED turning on A channel where data other than the above is set operates in the same way as when the A D conversion is disabled APPENDICES 13 Averaging process specification This area is used for setting sampling processing or selecting the type of averaging processing for each channel There are the following types of averaging processing time average count average and moving average b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to bO CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 Processing method Setting value Sampling processing OH Time average 1H Count average 2H Moving average 3H a Enabling the setting Turn on and off Initial data setting request flag RYQ to enable the setting b Default value The
282. tput signal RX18 of the main A D converter module to Remote output RY of the extension output module by using the external signal assignment function When an alart is issued assigned Remote output RY is turned on a Setting range With the head of Remote output RY of the main A D converter module as a starting point 0000H set the number which is counted from the head of Remote output RY of the extension output module When Alert output signal RX18 is assigned to Remote output RY numbered 2H as counted from the head OH of the extension output module Main A D converter module Extension output module OH to 2H to FH OH to 1FH 20H to 22H to 2FH Remote output RY numbered 2H as counted from the head of the extension output module corresponds to Remote output RY numbered 22H as counted from the head of the main A D converter module Thus set 22H for Alert output signal assignment address 0004H b Enabling the setting Turn on and off Initial data setting request flag RY9 to enable the setting c Default value The default value is No assignment FFFFH d Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory address of this area is as follows Remote buffer memory name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Alert output signal assignment 0004H Point Setting a value out of the range results in the error code 0172H being stored in Latest error code RWr0 Error flag RXA
283. ts the CC Link IE Field Network synchronous communication function set to 0 Normal conversion mode In the MELSEC iQ R series master station setting each slave station to Synchronous or Asynchronous allows their operation synchronous communication mode or normal mode to be managed and configured at a time by the master station Note however that settings for the extension modules have no effect Their operation follows the settings of the main module connected Detect Now Mode Setting Online Standard Mode Assignment Method Start End x Link Scan Time Approx 0 76 ms d FEE FF Station Type RX RY Setting RWw RWr Setting Reserved Error Invalid Network Synchronous Points Start End Points Start End Station Communication E 0 HostStation 0 Master Station EE Ee NZ2EX2B 60AD4 16 0020 002F 16 0010 001F Asynchronous e 2 NZ2GF2B 60DA4 2 Remote Device Station 32 0000 001F 16 0000 000F No Setting Synchronous en NZ2EX2B 60AD4 16 0020 002F 16 0010 001F Asynchronous Ee 3 NZ2GF2B1 16D 3 Remote Device Station 16 0000 000F 20 0000 0013 No Setting Asynchronous 2 Drive mode of extension modules When an extension analog module is connected to a main analog module the extension analog module operates in the drive mode corresponding to that of the main analog module YOIIMS PON AA Z 8 The following table lists the details f Drive mode of extension analo Main analog module Extension analo
284. tual system ensure the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems E Relevant modules NZ2GF2BN 60AD4 NZ2EX2B 60AD4 Unless otherwise specified this manual describes the program examples in which the remote I O signals and remote registers are assigned for an A D converter module as follows e Remote input signal RXO to RX1F main A D converter module RX20 to RX2F extension A D converter module e Remote output signal RYO to RY1F main A D converter module RY20 to RY2F extension A D converter module e Remote register RWr RWr0 to RWrF main A D converter module RWr10 to RWr1F extension A D converter module e Remote register RWw RWw0 to RWwF main A D converter module RWw10 to RWw1F extension A D converter module For the assignment of remote I O signals and remote registers refer to the following LA User s manual for the master local module used RELEVANT MANUALS 1 CC Link IE Field Network relevant manuals When using the CC Link IE Field Network for the first time refer to CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual or Simple Motion Module User s Manual first The following shows the structure of the CC Link IE Field Network manuals Manual name lt manual number model code gt MELSEC Q CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual SH 080917ENG 13JZ47 MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual SH
285. turns off turning off Error clear request flag RYA from on does not allow Error flag RXA to turn off For the timing OFF ON OFF refer to the following e Error flag Page 191 Appendix 1 1 3 e Input signal error detection signal Page 195 Appendix 1 1 9 b When a major error occurs Error flag RXA does not turn off even by turning on and off Error clear request flag RYA For the timing OFF ON gt OFF refer to the following e Error flag gt Page 191 Appendix 1 1 3 c Device number The device number of this output signal is as follows Signal name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Error clear request flag RYA 198 APPENDICES 3 CHO Difference conversion trigger This signal is used as a trigger to start and stop the difference conversion For details on the difference conversion function refer to the following e Difference Conversion Function 5 Page 122 Section 8 14 Difference conversion trigger Setting value No request OFF Trigger request ON a Starting Stopping the difference conversion e Changing CHO Difference conversion trigger RY14 to RY17 RY24 to RY27 from No request OFF to Trigger request ON initiates difference conversion e Changing CHO Difference conversion trigger RY14 to RY17 RY24 to RY27 from Trigger request ON to No request OFF stops the difference conversion b Device number The device numbers of this output signal are as fo
286. turns on As Error flag RXA turns on Remote READY RXB turns off a Device number The device number of this input signal is as follows Signal name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Remote READY RXB 5 CHO A D conversion completed flag CHU A D conversion completed flag RX10 to RX13 RX20 to RX23 turns on as the A D conversion is completed in the A D conversion enabled channels Turning on and off Initial data setting request flag RY9 makes the signal return to the default state off When A D conversion is completed the signal turns on a Device number The device numbers of this input signal are as follows Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Signal name CHO A D conversion completed flag RX23 6 CHO Difference conversion state flag This signal allows the difference conversion status to be checked CHO Difference conversion state flag RX14 to RX17 RX24 to Difference conversion status RX27 Not converted OFF Converting difference ON e Changing CHO Difference conversion trigger RY14 to RY17 RY24 to RY27 from No request OFF to Trigger request ON results in CHO Difference conversion state flag RX14 to RX17 RX24 to RX27 turning to Converting difference ON e Changing CHO Difference conversion trigger RY 14 to RY17 RY24 to RY27 from Trigger request ON to No request OFF results in CHO Difference conversion state flag RX14 to RX17 RX24 to RX2
287. type results in SP UNIT LAY ERR C shows ro aac ee Point Pshows notes that reference pages require attention SCSSHSHESHESEHSSHSSEHEHSESHSESEHSHEEHEHEHEHESEHEEEE e eeeeeeeeeoee KEER When an intelligent module is connected V O assignment can be omitted by selecting connected modules from Intelligent Function Module in the Project window be tae tae eee AEREN OAE remark enews cisetl information 73 4 The mouse operation example is provided below Tr MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Unset Project PRG MAIN Project Edit Find Replace Compile View Online Debug Diagno Menu bar Te Pix XZ Online 5 gt Write to PLC ee ee ee Select Online on the menu bar and then select Write to PLC Navigation A window selected in the view selection area is displayed W Project window 5 gt Parameter Parameter Intelligent Function Module Global Device Comment 5 gt PLC Parameter H g Setting Select Project from the view selection Program area to open the Project window G m MAN PRA In the Project window expand Parameter and H E Device Memory select PLC Parameter Device hitial Value errr rrr rr View selection area Unlabeled 11 TERMS Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following terms Term A D converter module Buffer memory CC Link IE Field Network Cyclic transmission Data link Dedicated instruction Disconnection Extension A D co
288. uch the core of the connector of the cable or the module and protect it from dirt and dust If any oil from your hand or any dirt or dust sticks to the core it can increase transmission loss causing data link to fail e Check the following e Is any Ethernet cable disconnected e Does any Ethernet cable short e Are the connectors securely connected b Broken cable latch Do not use Ethernet cables with broken latches Doing so may cause the cable to unplug or malfunction c Connecting and disconnecting an Ethernet cable Hold the connector part when connecting and disconnecting the Ethernet cable Pulling the cable connected to the module may result in damage to the module or cable or malfunction due to poor contact d Connector to which an Ethernet cable is not connected To prevent dust from entering the module attach the provided connector cover e Maximum station to station distance for an Ethernet cable maximum cable length The maximum station to station distance is 100m However the distance may be shorter depending on the operating environment of the cable For details contact the manufacturer of the cables used f Bending radius of an Ethernet cable There are restrictions on the bending radius of the Ethernet cable Check the bending radius in the specifications of the Ethernet cables used CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6 6 Wiring of Terminal Block and External Devices 1 Tightening torque Tighten th
289. ues can be obtained without any program which leads to a reduction in the cost of creating a program Analog input signals CH1 to CH4 eas aN a aa eh ED J CG CJ GC Displacement sensor Extension input module Main A D converter module Trigger conversion request by the external signal assignment function 5 Change to any scale A D conversion values can be converted to be within any scale the range of which is determined arbitrarily _ N TI D Q pmj Cc D According to the device that handles digital operation values the scale can be changed without any program resulting in cost reduction 6 Detection of the disconnection An input range of 1 to 5V or 4 to 20mA allows the detection of the disconnection of analog input facilitating the diagnosis of the cause at the time of a trouble In combination with the external signal assignment function the extension output module allows a signal input signal error detection signal to be output to the outside without any program upon detection of the disconnection At this time there is no influence of the sequence scan and link scan 17 18 7 Input and output without an influence of the sequence scan and link scan Using the external signal assignment function allows a trigger conversion request to be input from the extension input module In the event of an error or an alert an erro
290. umber of conversion enabled channels Ex Assuming that the conversion speed setting is 100us and the number of conversion enabled channels is 4 for both the main A D converter module and the extension A D converter module Sampling period of the main A D converter module 100uUs 100us 100us 100us 100uUs 100us 100us 100us Main A D converter modus CH1 conversion enabled Conversion channels CH1 to CH4 processing Extension A D converter p CH1 l i module conversion enabled X Conversion channels CH1 toCH4 _ processing _ti voti i ti woti Sampling period of the main A D converter module 100us 100us x 4 800us Sampling period of the extension A D converter module 100us 100us x 4 800us UONOUN4 YO MS peeds UOISIBAUOD G g 91 b With a conversion speed of 400s Between the conversion processing 400us of each channel processing time 100s is generated Therefore the sampling period is given by the following Sampling period Conversion speed 400us Processing time 100us x Number of conversion enabled channels zy Assuming that the conversion speed setting is 400us and the number of conversion enabled channels is 4 for both the main A D converter module and the extension A D converter module Sampling period of the main A D converter module Main A D converter module 1A A conversion enabled Conversion l i Conversion i Conversion l Conversion
291. umber of points with the connected extension module e Poor contact of the extension analog module or the influence of noise is a possible cause e If the error persists even after contact check and anti noise action the failure of the module is a possible cause Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Poor contact of the extension analog module or the influence of noise is a possible cause e If the error persists even after contact check and anti noise action the failure of the module is a possible cause Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 4 To clear the error modify the set value within the range and perform one of the following two operations e Turning on and off Error clear request flag RYA e Turning on and off Initial data setting request flag RY9 2 Turning on and off Error clear request flag RYA or Initial data setting request flag RY9 does not clear this error The error is cleared only by the method described in the action column 179 JSI p09 JON ZL Point For two or more errors only the latest error code is stored in Latest error code RWr0 or Latest warning code RWr1 The errors that have occurred in the past can be checked in the error history of the engineering tool For the error history refer to the following e Checking by executing a command of the slave station Page 168 Section 11 1 1 e Error history data Page 222 Appendix 3 23 11
292. urrent value a Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory addresses of this area are as follows Extension A D converter module Remote buffer memory name Aa ae aun AP Point With the averaging processing specified the maximum and minimum values are updated per averaging process cycle otherwise updated per sampling cycle With the following functions used values computed by each function are stored in the maximum value and the minimum value e Digital clipping function e Scaling function e Shift function e Difference conversion function 22 Extension module identification code The identification code for a connected extension module is stored If the extension A D converter module is connected 2111H is stored For the identification code for extension modules other than the extension A D converter module refer to the following LA Manual including the description of the extension module used a Remote buffer memory address The remote buffer memory address of this area is as follows Remote buffer memory name Main A D converter module Extension A D converter module Extension module identification code Se 0700H 221 Aowa JOLING sJoWsY jo sjiejaq xIpueddy 23 Error history data0 Up to 15 errors occurred in the module are recorded The following table and figure show the storage contents for Error history 1 address OAQOH to OAOF b15 to b8 b7 to bO Last two digits of year 0
293. ut Point Assigning a remote input signal of the main A D converter module to a remote output signal of the extension output module does not allow the assigned remote output signal to be turned on off or monitored by program Change or monitor the pre assigned remote input signal of the main module In the above example change or monitor Alert output signal RX18 147 P9 D UUOD ajNpoy uosua xg Ue YIM SUOI OUN 8 8 b Setting procedure 1 Set Method selection to Parameter write X CC IE Field Configuration window gt Select a main A D converter module from List of stations gt CC IE Field Configuration gt Online gt Parameter Processing of Slave Station In Basic module parameter set CHO A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable M E 4 0 conversion enable disable setting eee GHI A D conversion enable disable setting 0 Enable E GH2 4 0 conversion enable disable setting 0 Enable aso eee GH3 AD conversion enable disable setting 0 Enable Db Enable GH4 440 conversion enabledisahle setting i Frahle Disable In Basic module parameter set CHO Alert output setting to 0 Enable _ Name Tnitial Value Read Value Write Value E Alert output function H GH Alert output setting 1 Digable H GH1 Process alarm upper upper limit value Woe aa T mr H GH Process alarm upper lower limit value H GH Process alarm lower up
294. ve When the unit test is completed with an error the error details can be checked in the error history To check the error history set the station number of the main A D converter module and connect the module to the master station with an Ethernet cable For the error history refer to the following e Checking by executing a command of the slave station Page 168 Section 11 1 1 e Error history dataO Page 222 Appendix 3 23 O1 C 4 n 185 11 6 Troubleshooting by Symptom This section describes troubleshooting problem by problem Troubleshooting by symptom is suitable for the case where modules fail to operate normally even though no error has occurred in the A D converter module If an error occurs in the A D converter module identify the cause of the error using the engineering tool 11 6 1 Main A D converter module 1 When digital operation value cannot be read Check item Is there any problem with the wiring such as looseness or disconnection of analog signal lines Is the CPU module in the STOP status Is the offset gain setting correct Is the input range setting correct Is A D conversion disabled for the channels where the analog value is to be input Is Initial data setting request flag RY9 executed Are the V and I terminals connected when the current is input Are the setting values of the averaging process setting correct Is there any
295. verages Moving average Ha Hd Averaging process setting CH4 Time average Gount averages Moving average Setting item Setting range e 1 Time average CHO Averaging process setting e 2 Count average e 3 Moving average 4 in Basic module parameter set the value of averaging processing in CHO Time average Count average Moving average iw O Averaging process setting He GH Averaging process setting 0 Sampling processing 1 Time average GH1 Time average Gount averageMoving average O A ae Selected processing for CHO Averaging Setting item ne Setting range process setting CHO Time average Count average Moving 2 Count average 4 to 65000 times average 3 Moving average 2 to 128 times 4 For time average set a value of 4 x Sampling period ms or more A value that does not satisfy this condition results in the error code 0200H 1200H being stored in Latest error code RWr0 Error flag RXA turning on and the ERR LED lighting up In CHO Digital operation value RWr2 to RWr5 RWr12 to RWr15 0 is stored Point For the extension A D converter module make the settings for each item of Ext module 1_ Module parameter 98 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 7 Range Switching Function The input range can be selected for each channel from the following ranges e Factory default range 4 to 20mA O to 20mA 1 to 5V 0 to 5V 10 to 10V e User range user range setting 1 user range setting 2 1 4
296. wer off Indicates the operating status of the main A D converter module RUN LED green e On Operating normally Writing data to the non volatile memory while in offset gain setting mode e Off Major error occurred Indicates the mode of the main A D converter module e On In online mode e Flashing In unit test mode e Off In offset gain setting mode MODE LED green Indicates the data link status of the main A D converter module e On Data link in operation cyclic transmission in progress e Flashing Data link in operation cyclic transmission stopped e Off Data link not performed disconnected Indicates the error status of the main A D converter module and the extension module ERR LED red e On Moderate error or major error occurred e Flashing Warning occurred e Off In normal operation 2 Indicates the alert status of the main A D converter module and the extension module e On Alert issued ALM LED red roc e Flashing Input signal error detected e Off In normal operation Indicates the module is in offset gain setting mode O G LED green e On In offset gain setting mode Off In a mode other than offset gain setting mode D LINK LED green Indicates the user range of a set target selected in offset gain setting mode V LED green Set target V LED LED LED green User range setting 1 10 to 10V Off User range setting 2 5 to 5V 20 to 20mA On Indicates the channel of a set t
297. xipueddy 2 Installation in a control panel The module is open type devices and must be installed inside a control panel This ensures safety as well as effective shielding of programmable controller generated electromagnetic noise a Control panel e Use a conductive control panel e When securing the top or bottom plate using bolts cover the grounding part on the control panel so that the part will not be painted e To ensure electrical contact between the inner plate and control panel take measures such as covering the bolts so that conductivity can be ensured in the largest possible area e Ground the control panel with a thick ground cable so that low impedance can be ensured even at high frequencies e Holes in the control panel must be 10cm diameter or less If the holes are larger than 10cm radio wave may be emitted In addition because radio waves leak through a clearance between the control panel and its door reduce the clearance as much as possible The leakage of radio waves can be suppressed by the direct application of an EMI gasket on the paint surface e Our tests have been carried out on a control panel having the attenuation characteristics of 37dB max and 30dB mean measured by 3m method 30 to 300MHz b Wiring of power cables and ground cables e Near the power supply part provide a ground point to the control panel Ground the FG terminal with the thickest and shortest possible ground cable 30cm or short
298. y i Page 135 Section 8 16 function This makes it possible to synchronize the operation with other slave stations sharing the same network allows A D conversion Notifies an error to the master station by the remote input signal if a moderate error or a major error occurs Page 142 Section 8 17 in the A D converter module The main A D converter module permits the connection of one extension I O module e With an extension input module connected remote output signals of the main A D converter module can be assigned to remote input signals of the extension input module connected gt Page 145 Section 8 18 1 e With an extension output module connected remote input signals of the main A D converter module can be assigned to remote output signals of the extension output module connected Functions unique to an extension I O module can also be used The main A D converter module permits the connection of one extension A D converter module Page 150 Section 8 18 2 eo Page 151 Section 8 18 3 With the extension A D converter module connected A D conversion processing of up to eight channels is possible The main A D converter module permits the connection of one extension D A converter module With the extension D A converter module connected A D conversion processing of four channels and D A conversion processing of four channels is possible Allows the presence or absence of a network error to be checked by a

CC-Link IE Field Network Analog-Digital

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents